COMPUTER SOFTWARE

APPLICATION

TRADE PRACTICAL NSQF

LEVEL - 5

VOLUME - 1

HANDBOOK FOR CRAFTS INSTRUCTOR

TRAINING SCHEME
Published by

National Instructional Media Institute

Post.Box.No. 3142,
Guindy, Chennai -
600032
Email : [email protected]
Website: www.nimi.gov.in
All Rights Reserved

First Edition, 2024

Printed in India at

National Instructional Media Institute

Post. Box. No. 3142,
Guindy,
Chennai - 600032

Copyright C 2024 NIMI

Disclaimer
The information contained herein has been obtained from sources reliable to
Directorate General of Training, New Delhi. NIMI disclaims all warranties to the
accuracy, completeness or adequacy of such information. NIMI shall have no liability
for errors, omissions, or inadequacies in the information contained herein, or for
interpretations thereof. Every effort has been made to trace the owners of the
copyright material included in the book. The publishers would be greatfull for
any omissions brought to their notice for acknowledgements in future editions of
the book. No entity in NIMI shall be responsible for any loss whatsoever, sustained
by any person who relies on this material. The material in this publication is
copyrighted. No parts of this publication may be reproduced, stored or distributed
in any form or by any means either on paper or electronic media, unless authorized
by NIMI.

ii
 A Comprehensive Training Program
under Crafts Instructor Training Scheme
(CITS)
for Instructors

HANDBOOK ON
TECHNICAL INSTRUCTOR TRAINING
MODULES

iii
iv
अतुल ितवारी, I.A.S. FOREWORD
सिचव GOVERNMENT OF INDIA
ATUL KUMAR TIWARI, I.A.S. MINISTRY OF SKILL
Secretary DEVELOPMENT AND
ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Foreword

In today’s rapidly evolving world, the role of skilled craftsmen and women is more crucial than
ever. The Craft Instructor Training Scheme (CITS) stands at the forefront of this
transformation, shaping the educators who will train the next generation of artisans and
technicians. This book aims to provide an in-depth understanding of the subject, exploring its
significance, methodologies, and impact on vocational training.
The Craft Instructor Training Scheme was established with the objective of enhancing the
quality of instruction in industrial training institutes and other vocational training institutions.
By equipping instructors with advanced skills and knowledge, the scheme ensures that they
are well-prepared to impart high-quality training to their students. This, in turn, contributes to
the creation of a highly skilled workforce capable of meeting the demands of modern industry.
The initial chapters provide the importance of specialized instructor training. Following this,
detailed chapters delve into the curriculum covering advanced techniques, safety protocols,
and instructional strategies. Each section is designed to offer both theoretical insights and
practical applications, ensuring a well-rounded understanding of the subject.
The book offers recommendations for overcoming obstacles and enhancing the effectiveness
of the program, with the ultimate goal of producing highly skilled instructors capable of
shaping the future workforce.
This book is intended for a diverse audience, including current and aspiring instructors,
vocational training administrators, policymakers, and industry stakeholders. It serves as a
valuable resource for understanding the intricacies of the subject and its pivotal role in
vocational education.
I extend my heartfelt gratitude to all contributors who have shared their experiences and
expertise, enriching this book with their valuable insights. Special thanks to the contribution of
the development team, reviewers and NIMI that have supported this endeavor, providing
essential data and resources.
It is my sincere hope that this book will inspire and guide readers in their efforts to enhance
vocational training, ultimately contributing to the development of a skilled and competent
workforce.

ATUL KUMAR TIWARI, I.A.S.

Secretary, MSDE

v
v
vi
 PREFACE
The Craft Instructor Training Scheme is an indispensable module of the Craftsmen
Training Scheme, which has been an integral part of the Indian skill development
industry since its inception. This program aims to equip instructors with the
necessary skills and teaching methodology to effectively transfer hands-on skills to
trainees and promote a holistic learning experience. The first Craft Instructor Training
Institute was established in 1948, followed by six more institutes across India in
1960. Today, these institutes, including the National Skill Training Institute (formerly
Central Training Institute for Instructors), offer the CITS course, which is mandated
by the Directorate General of Training (DGT).

The Craft Instructor training program is designed to develop skilled manpower

for industries. The course aims to offer instructors an opportunity to improve their
instructional skills, engage learners effectively, offer impactful mentoring, and make
efficient use of resources, leading to a more skilled workforce in various industries.
The program emphasizes collaborative and innovative approaches to teaching,
resulting in high-quality course delivery. Overall, the Craft Instructor Training Scheme
is a pivotal program that helps instructors grow in their careers and make a
significant contribution to society. This program is essential for developing skilled
manpower and promoting a robust learning environment that benefits both trainees
and instructors alike.

vii
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
National Instructional Media Institute (NIMI) sincerely acknowledges with thanks for the
co-operation and contribution extended by the following experts to bring out this Instructional
material (Trade Practical) for CITS Computer Software Application (Volume - I of II)
(NSQF Level - 5) under the IT & ITES Sector for Instructors.

MEDIA DEVELOPMENT COMMITTEE MEMBERS

Shri. P.A. Sulabha - Training Officer,

NSTI (W), Trivandrum, Kerala.

Shri. M.K. Sunil - Training Officer,

NSTI, Chennai.

COORDINATORS

Shri. G.C. Ramamurthy - Joint Director,

CD - Section, DGT.

Shri. T.V. Rajasekar - Joint Director,

NIMI, Chennai.

Shri. Shiv Kumar - Training Officer,

CD - Section,
DGT.

NIMI records its appreciation of the Data Entry, CAD, DTP Operators for their excellent and
devoted services in the process of development of this Instructional Material.

NIMI also acknowledges with thanks, the invaluable efforts rendered by all other staff who have
contributed for the development of this Instructional Material.

NIMI is grateful to all others who have directly or indirectly helped in developing this IMP.

viii
 ABOUT THE TEXT BOOK

The Vocational Instructor Training Program is a comprehensive initiative designed to equip

aspiring students with the necessary skills and knowledge to effectively teach in vocational
education settings. This program encompasses a range of pedagogical strategies,
instructional techniques, and subject-specific content tailored to the diverse vocational fields.
Participants engage in coursework that covers curriculum development, assessment
methods, classroom management, and the integration of industry-relevant technologies.
Practical experience and hands-on training are emphasized, allowing participants to apply
theoretical concepts in real- world teaching environments. Through collaborative learning
experiences and mentorship opportunities, aspiring vocational instructors develop the
confidence and competence to facilitate engaging and impactful learning experiences for
their students. This training program aims to cultivate a new generation of educators who
are not only proficient in their respective vocational fields but also adept at fostering the
success and employability of their students in today’s competitive workforce.
This text book covers communication, self-management, information and communication
technology, entrepreneurial and green skills. It has been developed as per the learning
outcome-based curriculum.

G C Rama Murthy,
Joint Director,
Curriculum Development, DGT,
MSDE, New Delhi.

ix
 CONTENT
Ex. No. Table of Contents Page No.

Module 1: Network Architecture

1 Straight cabling and cross cabling 1
2 Switch Configuration 3
3 LAN and WAN setup 6
4 Setting TCP/IP 10
5 Network Monitoring and Control 12
6 Wireless Networking Design 15
7 Implementing Voice over IP 19
8 Configuring DHCP, IPV4/IPV6 21
9 Configuring Network Security for preventing Attacks 30
10 Setting password policy 32
11 Sniffing on Switched Networks 33
12 IP Address Spoofing 35
13 DNS Spoofing 36
14 Password Cracking: Dictionary vs Brute- Force vs Hybrid methods 39
15 Handling Denial-of-Service (DoS) 41
16 Using Tools like John the Ripper, Cain & Abeletc 42
17 Configuring Firewalls 46

Module 2: Database Concepts

18 Installation Steps of MySQL 49
19 Troubleshooting Basic Installation Issues 58
20 Creating and Using a Database in MySQL 59
21 Designing of Tables 64
22 Applying Data Integrity Rules 69
23 Using the DDL, DCL, DML statements 72
24 Enforcing Constraints, Primary Key and Foreign Key 77
25 Adding indices to tables 79
26 Simple Select Queries 82
27 Insert, Update and Delete Queries 84
28 Using the Number, Date and Character Functions 89
29 Joins, Group by, Having, Sub query 93
30 Indexing and Optimizing query 101
31 Creating & Using Stored procedure 103
32 Creating and executing MySQL table level Triggers 105

x
Ex. No. Table of Contents Page No.

33 Creating Cursors in MYSQL 107

34 Using Cursors in MySQL 110
35 Implementing MySQL Security 113
36 Simple application on database using SP, Triggers, Cursors & Indexing 115

Module 3: Introduction to Java Script

37 Using the JAVA Script Syntax 118
38 Using Variables, Operators and Writing Expressions 120
39 Programming with Control Flow statements 130
40 Creating and using Objects in JavaScript 141
41 Creating and using Functions 146
42 Using Java Script with Forms 151
43 Creating Cookies with JavaScript 155
44 Creating CSS 159
45 Error Handling in JavaScript 169
46 Implementing an AJAX application 173

Module 4: PHP (Hyper text pre processor)

47 Demonstrate on- Paginators, popovers, progress, spinner 175
48 Demonstrateon Table, toasts, tooltips 189
49 Demonstrate on Bootstrap Styling essentials like Breakpoints for
components, layouts and grid systems. Practice on typography, floats, flex,
alignment, borders, position of elements, shadow and visibility 198
50 Perform Installation of Apache Web Server Practice simple PHP
programs. Practicing on programming to test events 213
51 Demonstrate on if statement Using the else clause with if statement, switch
statement Using the? operator, while statement, do while statement, for
statement, Breaking out of loops, Nesting loops 226
52 Demonstrate on Function and returning value from function, user defined
functions, dynamic functions, variable scope, accessing variable with the
global statement, Function calls with the static statement, setting default
values for arguments, Passing arguments to a function by value,
Passing arguments to a function by reference, Testing for function existence 235
53 Demonstratethe Writing to the browser, Getting input from forms, Output
buffering, Session handling, Regular expression, Common math,
Random numbers, File upload, File download, Environment variables 244
54 Demonstrate on E-mail in PHP, anatomy of a cookie, setting a cookie
with PHP, deleting a cookie, creating session cookie, working with
the query string, creating query string, starting a session, Working
with
session, variables, Destroying session, passing session IDs, Encoding and 255
decoding session variables

xi
Ex. No. Table of Contents Page No.
55 Demonstrateon Creating and deleting a file, Reading and writing text
files, working with directories in PHP, checking for existence of file,
determining file size, opening a file for writing, reading, or appending, 269
Writing Data to the file Reading characters

56 Work With Forms - Super global variables the server array A script to
acquire user input, importing user input Accessing user input, Combine
HTML and PHP code., using hidden fields 283
57 Demonstrate redirecting the user, File upload and scripts. 291
58 Demonstrate Regular Expressions - The basic regular expressions, PCRE,
Matching patterns, Finding matches, Replace patterns, Modifiers, Breakup
Strings. 294
59 Demonstrate working with Classes And Objects - Creating an object,
Object properties, Object methods, Object constructors and destructors. 311
60 Perform class constants, Class inheritance Abstract classes and methods,
Object serialization, checking for class and method, existence, Exceptions,
Iterators 315
61 Creating and using Functions
329
62 Using Java Script with Forms
343
Module 5: Advanced Excel
63 Protect sheet using password 345

64 Use flash fill techniques 353

65 Perform Goal Seek, Solver & Scenarios on Data 358

66 Use different types of cell references 380

67 Use R1C1 notation 388

68 Use array formula 397

69 Audit excel formula 405

70 Create and modify simple macros 414

71 Perform form controls and create simple data entry form with macros 425

72 Look up data by using functions 433

73 Use advanced date functions 438

74 Demonstrate advanced charts 444

75 Demonstrate pivot tables 455

76 Demonstrate a power query, power query function. Invoking the power

query function and combining queries. Organize the workbook queries 473

77 Demonstrate Power BI for simple data visualizations 499

xii
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Module 1 : Network Architecture

EXERCISE 1 : Straight cabling and cross cabling
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• crimp a straight through ethernet cable
• crimp a crossover through ethernet cable.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Ethernet cable • Wire stripper/cutter
• RJ 45 connector • LAN Tester
• Crimping tool • PCs/Laptops

Procedure
TASK 1: Crimping a straight through ethernet
cable
Straight through ethernet cables are the standard cable used for almost all purposes, and are often called “patch
cables”. It is highly recommend you duplicate the color order as shown on the below.

1 Take the Cat6 Cable of 1 meter.

2 Strip 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.1 cm) of the outer skin at the end of the cable wire by making a shallow cut in the
skin with a crimping Tool.
3 Unwind and pair the similar colours.
4 Fold each pair of wires backwards to expose the core of the cable.
5 Straighten the twisted wires.
6 Arrange the untwisted wires in a row, placing them into the position, running from right to left, in which they
will go into the RJ-45 connector:
a Orange with a white stripe
b Orange
c Green with a white stripe
d Blue

1
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

e Blue with a white stripe

f Green
g Brown with a white stripe
h Brown
7 Trim the untwisted wires to a suitable length by holding the RJ-45 connector next to the wires.
8 Insert the wires into the RJ-45 connector, making sure that they stay aligned and each color goes into its
appropriate channel.
9 Use the crimping tool to crimp the RJ-45 connector to the cable by pressing the jacket and cable into the
connector so that the wedge at the bottom of the connector is pressed into the jacket.
10 Follow the instructions above to crimp an RJ-45 connector to the opposite end of the cable.
11 Use a cable tester to assure that your cable is working properly when both ends are crimped.

TASK 2: Crimping a Crossover Through Ethernet Cable

Crossover cables - The purpose of a Crossover Ethernet cable is to directly connect one computer to another computer
(or device) without going through a router, switch or hub.

1 Crimp one end following the steps in Task 1

2 For the next end Follow the similar steps for preparation and then
3 Arrange the untwisted wires in a row, placing them into the position, running from right to left, in which they
will go into the RJ-45 connector:
a Green with a white stripe
b Green
c Orange with a white strip
d Blue
e Blue with a white strip
f Orange
g Brown with a white strip
h Brown
4 Trim the untwisted wires to a suitable length by holding the RJ-45 connector next to the wires.
5 Insert the wires into the RJ-45 connector, making sure that they stay aligned and each color goes into its
appropriate channel.
6 Use the crimping tool to crimp the RJ-45 connector to the cable by pressing the jacket and cable into the
connector so that the wedge at the bottom of the connector is pressed into the jacket.
7 Use a cable tester to assure that your cable is working properly when both ends are crimped.

2
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 1
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 2 : Switch Configuration

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use cisco packet tracee application
• configure a switch by using cisco packet tracer.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop
• Cisco pocket tracee software

Procedure
TASK 1: Configure the Switch
Step 1: Open the packet tracer desktop and take a switch (PT-Switch) from the devices.
Step 2: Configure the Host name of the swicth0.
• Click on switch0 and go to Command Line Interface.
• Then change the hostname to “sh”
Command:
switch> switch>en
switch#conf t
switch(config)#hostname sh
sh(config)exit
Step 3: Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner for the users.
Command:
sh(config)#banner motd $
• Then, enter MOTD and end it with ‘$’ to exit.

3
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 4: Set up line control password and enable secret password.

To configure the Line Control password and Enable secret follow the below commands:
sh#conf t sh(config)#
sh(config)#line con 0
sh(config-line)#password GFG123
sh(config-line)#login
sh(config-line)#exit sh(config)#enable
secret GFG@123 sh(config)#exit

Step 5: Verify the password

• When you try to log in first, it will ask for the line control password.
• Then, to configure the terminal it will ask to enable a secret password.

4
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 2
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

To save the configuration use the below command:

Command:
sh#copy run startup-config

5
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 2
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 3 : LAN and WAN setup

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create a LAN and check connectivity by between two computer
• share a file, folder and a printer over a network
• configure a router and set up a WAN.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• 2 or more PC/Laptop connected to a network
• Printer
• Router

Procedure
Connecting two computers using LAN
TASK 1: Creating a LAN
1 Determine whether or not your computers have Ethernet ports.
2 Check to see if you have a crossover Ethernet cable.
3 Plug one end of the Ethernet cable in to one computer.
4 Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable in to the other computer.
5 Finish.

TASK 2: Checking the IP address of a given computer

1 Open the command prompt. press windows + R and type cmd into the field. Press Enter to open the command
prompt.
2 Type IP config and press Enter. This will display a list of your network connection information. All of the network
connections on your computer will be displayed.
3 Find your IP address your active connection may be labelled wireless network connection, Ethernet adapter,
or Local Area Connection. It may also be labelled by the manufacturer of your network adapter. Find your
active connection and look for ipv4 address.
• The IP address is four sets of digits, with up tc three digits per set. For example, it might look like 192.168.1.
4 Finish.

TASK 3: Check connectivity between two computers

1 Open the command prompt. Press windows + R and type cmd into the field. Press Enter to open the command
prompt.
2 Type the word “ping” Followed by a space and then your IP address at the DOS prompt (e.g.ping
111.22.33.4). Press the “Enter” key once.
3 View the result of the ping. If a result of “request timed out” appears, then there is a problem with either
the computer or the network. A successful ping will result in a response of “Replay from” followed by the IP
address.
4 Repeat the above steps in the other computer
5 Finish.

6
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4: Sharing a File or Folder over a Network

1 Switch on the system.
2 Open control panel and click network and internet. Click network and sharing Centre.
a Click change advanced sharing settings to the left of your network name.
b Find the folder you wish to share. Right click on it.
3 Select the “share with” option. This will open the sharing submenu. You can choose to share it with everyone
in your Home group or select specific people to share it with.
a When choosing a Home group option, you can allow other Home group members to both read and write to
the folder, or limit them to just read from it.
4 Click the specific people option to select which user you want to share with. This will open a new window
with a list of all the users that currently have access to the folder. You can add users to this list and give
them specific permissions for the folder.
a To share the folder with everyone, click the dropdown menu at the top and select everyone. Click the add
button.
b To share with specific users, click the dropdown menu and select them or type in the name and click add.
5 Set permissions for users on the list. Find a user on the list that you want to change the permissions for.
Look in the permissions level column, and click the arrow next to the existing permission. Select the new one
from the list.
a Read – user can see, copy, and open files from the folder, but cannot change files or add new ones.
b Read/write – besides read abilities, users can change files and add new files to the shared folder. Files can
be deleted by users with r3ead/write permissions.
c Remove- removes permission for this user, and removes them from the list.
6 Click the share button. Your permission settings will be saved, and the folder will be available on the network
for all allowed users.
7 Finish.

TASK 5: Opening a shared file or folder over a network

1 Start the computer.
2 Make sure you are on the correct network. In order to open a shared folder from a different computer, you
must be using the same internet network as the computer which is sharing the file.
3 Open start click the windows logo in the bottom-left corner of the screen. The start menu will pop up.
4 Open settings click the settings gear in the lower-left corner of the start menu. This will open the settings
window.
5 Click network and internet. This is in the middle of the settings window.
6 Click the network and sharing center. It is a link toward the bottom of the page.
a You may need to scroll down to see this link. If you still cannot find the link after scrolling down, click the
status tab in the upper left corner of the window and look again.
7 Click change advanced sharing settings. This is in the upper-left side of the window. A new window will open.
8 Turn on network discovery and file sharing. Check both the turn on network discovery box and the turn on file
and printer sharing box.
9 Click save changes. It is at the bottom of the window. Doing so saves your settings.
10 Open file explorer click the file explorer app icon at the bottom of the screen, or right click the start icon and
then click file explorer in the resulting pop-up menu.
a You can also press Win+E to open the file explorer.

7
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 3
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

11 Click network. It‟s is near the bottom of the sidebar that is on the left of the file explorer
window. a You may have to scroll down in the file explorer‟s left-hand sidebar to see this
option.
12 Select a computer. Double-click the name of the computer from which the folder you want to open is being
shared.
13 Select a folder. Double-click the folder you want to open is being shared.
14 Enter a username and password if prompted. This will usually be the username and password used to log
into the computer which is sharing the folder. Doing so correctly will cause the folder to open.
a If a folder isn‟t protected, double clicking it will open it immediately.
15 Finish.

TASK 6: Sharing a Printer over a Network

1 Switch on the system.
2 Click on the Windows start button and navigate to setting, control panel, printers. Right click on the printer to
be shared.
3 Select “change sharing options‟ if network and print sharing has not already been enabled. Follow the prompts
to allow sharing.
4 Check the button next to “share this printer”. Enter a share name for the printer. This is the name that other
users on the network will see when searching for printers.
a Limit the name to 8 letters with no characters or spaces.
5 Select “additional drivers” if there are other computers on the network with older Windows operating
systems. Follow the promotes to install drivers for these computers.
a This will save time since the drivers won‟t have to be downloaded and installed separately on the other
computers.
6 Finish.

TASK 7: Operating a Shared File or Folder over a Network.

1 Start the computer.
2 Follow the same steps to get to the printers setting on the other computer.
3 Right click” add printer” and select “network printer”. Allow Windows to search the network for printers.
a If the printer isn‟t found automatically, select “the printer I want is not listed. Select “browse for printers”
and find the computer that attached to the USB printer. Click the plus sign to expand it, and then select
the printer.
4 Finish

TASK 8: Sharing a Printer over a Network

1 Turn on your printer into an electrical outlet if necessary, then press the Printers “Power” button to turn on the
printer if it isn‟t already on.
2 Connect your printer to your network. The process for this varies from printer to printer. Most modern
printers can connect your network via WI-FI. Some printers may be able to connect via Ethernet cable,
though this requires that they be close enough to the router for Ethernet to be viable.
a If your printer is WI-FI capable, you can generally connect it to the network using the built-in menu display.
Refer to your printer‟s documentation or look up the model online for exact instructions.
b Make sure your Wi-Fi printer is close enough to the router to get a solid signal.
3 Connect to the printer (Windows). Now that the printer is your network, you can use the Windows “Add a
Printer” wizard to automatically install the necessary software on your on your Computer to use it. If you are
using OS X, Skip down to the next step.[1]

8
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 3
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

a) Click the start menu and select Control Panel. Windows 8 users can press Win and type “Control panel”.
b) Select “Devices and Printers” or “View Devices and Printers”.
c) Click Add a printer at the top of the window.
d) Select “Add network, Bluetooth printer”.
e) Select your network printer from the list and click Next.
f) Install the necessary drivers if prompted. Windows should be able to find and install the correct drivers for
most printers.
4 Printer to the network printer. Once you’ve added to the printer to the operating system, you can print it just
as you would a printer connected directly to your computer. Simply select the printer from the “Print” window
of any program.
a) Make sure that the printer is turned and that you are connected to the same network. That will save time
since the drivers won‟t have to be downloaded and installed separately on the other computers.
5 Finish.

TASK 9: Setup a WAN

1 Select WAN Connection Type
Choose the appropriate WAN connection type based on your needs.
2 Sign Up with an ISP
Select an ISP and sign up for a WAN connection plan.
3 Install Modem or Router
Install a modem or router provided by your ISP or purchase one separately.
Connect the cables:
1 Once you’ve acquired a wireless router, you’ll need to connect it to your existing Internet modem.
2 Connect an Ethernet cable from your modem to the wireless router (there is usually a short Ethernet cable
included with your wireless router for this purpose).
3 Plug in the power cable for the wireless router.
4 Wait at least 30 to 60 seconds, and make sure the lights on your router are working correctly.
Configure your router:
1 Using your web browser, enter the router’s default IP address into the address bar and then press Enter.
Your router’s instructions should include this information, but some of the most common addresses include
192.168.0.1, 192.168.1.1, and 192.168.2.1.
2 The router’s sign-in page will appear. Again, the exact sign-in details should be included with your router’s
instructions, but most routers use a standard user name and password combination, such as admin and
password.
3 Your router’s settings page will appear. Locate and select the Network Name setting, then enter a unique
network name.
4 Locate and select the Network Password setting, and choose an Encryption option. There are several types
of encryption you can use, but we recommend WPA2, which is generally considered to be the most secure.
5 Enter your desired password. Make sure to use a strong password to help ensure no one else can access
your network.
6 Locate and select the Save button to save your settings.

9
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 3
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 4 : Setting TCP/IP

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• assign IP address to a PC
• setup TCP/IP connection

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows PC/Laptop connected to a network

Procedure
1 Select Start, then select Settings > Network & Internet .

2 Do one of the following:

• Choose the network you want to change the settings for, then select Properties.
• For an Ethernet network, select Ethernet, then select the Ethernet network you’re connected to.
3 Under IP assignment, select Edit.
4 Under Edit IP settings, select Manual.
5 To specify IPv4 settings manually
i Under Edit IP settings, choose Manual, then turn on IPv4.
ii To specify an IP address, in the IP address, Subnet prefix length, and Gateway boxes, type the IP address
settings.
iii To specify a DNS server address, in the Preferred DNS and Alternate DNS boxes, type the addresses of
the primary and secondary DNS servers.

10
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• When you select Automatic (DHCP), the IP address settings and DNS server address setting are set
automatically by your router or other access point (recommended).
• When you select Manual, you can manually set your IP address settings and DNS server address.

6 When you’re done, select OK/Save.

11
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 4
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 5 : Network Monitoring and Control

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• install SNMP agent
• configure the SNMP service
• configure RMON.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows server
• PC/Laptop
• Network connection

Procedure
TASK 1: Install SNMP Agent and configure the community string
1 Open the Control Panel on your Windows machine.
2 Open the Programs and Features.
3 Select Turn Windows features on or off.
4 On Windows workstations (Windows 10) select Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and install it.

5 On Windows Server 2016 and above you’ll have to click Next in the Add Roles and Features Wizard until you
reach the Features sections where you can install the SNMP Service.

12
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Install SNMP Service

Note : The system will automatically install SNMP Tools required by the service.

TASK 2: configure the SNMP service

1 Run services. msc as administrator.
2 Navigate to the Properties of the SNMP service.
3 Select Automatic as the Startup type. The service always runs, even after turning your computer off and on
again.
4 For monitoring purposes, select all of the services on the Agent tab to have all SNMP properties available.
5 Click on the Security tab and adjust the security parameters like the community string and the IP/host filter
list to your security compliance. For example, add the community string public with READ ONLY rights and
accept SNMP packets from at least the address of your monitoring server.

13
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 5
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Enable RMON on devices

1 Access the device’s configuration interface.
2 Enable RMON functionality on interfaces or VLANs that need to be monitored.
3 Specify RMON groups and parameters based on monitoring requirements.
Configure RMON Probes (For RMON2):
1 Install RMON2 probe software on devices capable of running probe applications.
2 Configure probes to monitor specific network segments or traffic types.
Define RMON Groups and Alarms:
1 Determine which RMON groups (Hosts, Matrix, Filters, etc.) are needed for monitoring.
2 Configure RMON groups to collect and analyze relevant statistics (e.g., packet counts, errors, protocol
distribution).
3 Set up alarms and thresholds for triggering notifications or actions based on predefined criteria.
Monitor and Analyze Data:
1 Use SNMP management tools or dedicated RMON management software to access and analyze collected
data.
2 Monitor network performance, identify trends, and troubleshoot issues using RMON statistics and reports.
Fine-Tune Configuration:
1 Periodically review RMON configurations and adjust parameters as needed based on network changes or
performance requirements.
2 Optimize RMON filters and alarms to focus on critical network metrics and reduce unnecessary overhead.

14
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 5
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 6 : Wireless Networking Design

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• design a wireless network

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows PC/Laptop
• Wireless router

Procedure
TASK 1: Wireless network design
1 When you power on the router, it will only generate its wi-fi network, and the device will be connected to the
router’s wi-fi connection, not the internet. To connect the router to the internet need a MAC address to the
internet service provider’s website.

2 The MAC address will display already the old one need to Reset the MAC address

15
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Enter the administrator name and password and click on login

4 Select the wireless network name and select the enable the wireless router radio and SSID broadcast

5 Select the WPA/WPA2 and fill all the fields.

16
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 6
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Enter the wireless password and click on the save button

7 Gave old administrator name and password and a new username and password then click on save.

17
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 6
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

8 Open the WIFI portal see the name is displaying then click on connect.

9 Enter the password0r security key which was given before and click on next button.

10 The WIFI is connected finally it is displaying in WIFI portal.

18
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 6
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 7 : Implementing Voiceover IP

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• configure VPN
• download and install skype.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows enabled PC/Laptop
• Internet connectivity with VPN
• Skype software setup

Procedure
TASK 1: Planning and preparation
1 Assess your needs:
2 Determine how many users will need VoIP, what features you require (e.g., call forwarding, voicemail), and
your budget.
3 Test your internet connection:
4 Ensure your upload and download speeds are sufficient for VoIP calls (generally, at least 3 Mbps for both). You
can use online speed tests to check.
5 Choose a VoIP provider:
6 Select a provider that meets your needs and budget, offering reliable service and features you need.
7 Decide on hardware:
8 Consider whether you’ll use physical VoIP phones, softphones (software apps on computers), or a combination.

TASK 2: Installation
1 Follow your provider’s instructions:
2 Each provider will have specific setup steps, so refer to their documentation or website for detailed guidance.
3 Configure your network:
4 Depending on your setup, you may need to adjust firewall settings, enable Quality of Service (QoS) for VoIP
traffic prioritization, or configure a Virtual Private Network (VPN) for added security.
5 Set up your devices:
6 Connect your VoIP phones or install the softphone app on your devices. Configure settings like your phone
number, voicemail, and call forwarding.

TASK 3: Download and Install Skype

1 Download skype link - ms-windows-store://pdp/?productid=9WZDNCRFJ364&cid=scom-web-store
2 Click on Download Button for download Skype in windows.
3 Click on Install button for installation process.
4 After installation you have to create an account using Sign in button.

19
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

20
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 7
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 8 : Configuring DHCP, IPV4/IPV6

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• install DHCP server
• configure DHCP server and creating scope
• provide IP address range along with subnet.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop
• Windows server
• Internet connectivity

Procedure
TASK 1: Installing DHCP Server
1 Open Server Manager from task bar and click Add roles and features

2 Before you run the installation wizard, make sure that an administrator account has a strong password, static
IP is configured, and security updates from Windows updates are installed. When you are done, click Next

21
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Select Role-based or feature-based installation and click Next

4 Select a destination server on which you want to install the DHCP server. In our case, there is only one server
which is local server and it is selected by default. Click Next

5 Select DHCP server role by checking the appropriate box. As soon as you check the box, a small window
will pop up alerting you that there are some other features which are also required to be installed along with
DHCP server. Click Add Features

22
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Click Next

7 Click Next

8 Note the things outlined in the screen and click Next

23
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

9 Confirm your installation selections and click Install

10 Click Close to finish the installation

TASK 2: Configuring DHCP Server and Creating Scope

1 Open Server Manager and click notifications icon. A small window will appear. Click Complete DHCP
configuration

24
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Click Next

3 Choose Skip AD authorization since we do not have any AD configured and click Commit

4 Read the summary and click Close

25
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Open Server Manager and click on Tools. When a small window appear, scroll to DHCP and click it

6 In management console, right click on IPv4 and scroll to New Scope and click it.

7 Click Next

26
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

8 Provide name and meaningful description of this new scope and click Next

9 Provide IP address range along with sub net you need to distribute to client machines and click Next

10 Provide any IP addresses you need to exclude from pool and click Add. I have excluded a first IP address
which is statically assigned to my DHCP server. Click Next

27
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

11 Keep lease duration as 8 days and click Next

12 Choose No, I will configure these options later and click Next

13 Click Finish to end the new scope wizard

28
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

14.Right-click on new scope you just created in above step and click Activate

15 Right-click on your server, scroll to All Tasks and then click Restart to finish with configuration

16 Open Command Prompt and Type : ipconfig /all

29
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 8
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 9 : Configuring Network Security for

preventing Attacks
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• implement a fire wall
• secure routers and wireless access point
• monitor network activity and security events.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC laptop with network connectivity
• Firewall
• Routers

Procedure
TASK 1: Implement a Firewall
1 Choose a firewall: Select a firewall suitable for your network size and needs. Hardware firewalls offer
robust protection, while software firewalls are more cost-effective for smaller networks.
2 Configure firewall rules: Define rules to allow only authorized traffic and block suspicious connections.
Consider factors like source IP addresses, destination ports, and protocols.
3 Enable logging and monitoring: Regularly review firewall logs to identify potential threats and adjust rules
accordingly.

TASK 2: Secure Your Routers and Wireless Access Points

1 Change default passwords: Replace factory-set passwords with strong, unique credentials for your router
and wireless access points.
2 Enable encryption: Secure your Wi-Fi network with WPA2 or WPA3 encryption to prevent unauthorized
access.
3 Disable remote access: If not necessary, disable remote management features on your router and access
points to reduce attack surfaces.
4 Update firmware regularly: Install firmware updates promptly to patch vulnerabilities and keep your
devices secure.

TASK 3: Employ Strong Passwords and User Authentication

1 Enforce strong password policies: Mandate complex passwords with a mix of uppercase and lowercase
letters, numbers, and symbols. Consider implementing multi-factor authentication (MFA) for added security.
2 Limit user privileges: Assign users the minimum level of access required for their tasks, minimizing
potential damage in case of compromised accounts.
3 Educate users on cyber security: Train employees and users on cyber hygiene practices like phishing
awareness, avoiding suspicious links, and reporting suspicious activity.

30
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4: Keep Software and Systems Updated

1 Update operating systems and applications regularly: Apply software updates promptly to patch known
vulnerabilities and security holes.
2 Disable unused software and services: Remove unnecessary software and services to reduce potential
attack vectors.

TASK 5: Monitor Network Activity and Security Events

1 Implement a Security Information and Event Management (SIEM) system: SIEM tools provide
centralized logs and real-time monitoring of security events across your network, helping you detect and
respond to threats promptly.
2 Regularly review security logs: Monitor logs for suspicious activity like failed login attempts, unauthorized
access attempts, and malware signatures.

TASK 6: Conduct Regular Security Assessments and Penetration Testing

1 Schedule regular vulnerability scans: Employ vulnerability scanners to identify weaknesses in your
network infrastructure and applications.
2 Perform penetration testing: Engage professional penetration testers to simulate real-world attacks and
identify exploitable vulnerabilities.
3 Address identified vulnerabilities: Prioritize and address identified vulnerabilities based on their severity
and potential impact.

31
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 9
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 10 : Setting password policy

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• implement a password policy.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC laptop with network connectivity

Procedure
Setting up a password policy in a network is an essential security measure to protect sensitive information and
resources from unauthorized access.
Implement a password policy
1 Assessment: Begin by assessing the current state of password security within your network. Understand
the existing password practices, weaknesses, and areas that need improvement.
2 Define Password Requirements: Determine the password requirements that users must adhere to. These
requirements typically include:
• Minimum password length: Suggest a minimum length of 8-12 characters.
• Complexity: Require a combination of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, and special
characters.
• Expiry: Set a policy for password expiration, such as every 90 days.
• History: Enforce a rule that prevents users from reusing old passwords.
• Lockout: Establish a threshold for failed login attempts before an account is locked out temporarily.
• Account Inactivity: Consider disabling or prompting for password change after a certain period of inactivity.
• Two-Factor Authentication (2FA): Encourage or mandate the use of 2FA where possible for an added
layer of security.
3 Communicate Policy: Clearly communicate the password policy to all users within the network. Explain the
rationale behind each requirement and the importance of adhering to them.
4 Implement Policy: Utilize the network’s administrative tools or security software to enforce the password
policy. This may involve configuring settings in:
• Active Directory (for Windows networks)
• Group Policy (for Windows networks)
• LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
• RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service)
• IAM (Identity and Access Management) solutions
• Password management tools
5 Enforcement: Regularly monitor adherence to the password policy. Implement mechanisms to enforce the
policy automatically, such as system prompts for password changes when they expire, or locking out
accounts after multiple failed login attempts.
6 Education and Training: Conduct training sessions or provide resources to educate users about the
importance of strong passwords, how to create them securely, and the consequences of weak password
practices.
7 Periodic Review and Update: Regularly review the password policy to ensure it remains effective and up-
to-date with evolving security threats and best practices. Make necessary adjustments based on feedback,
security incidents, or changes in regulations.
8 Testing: Periodically conduct security audits or penetration tests to evaluate the effectiveness of the
password policy and identify any vulnerabilities that need to be addressed.

32
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 11 : Sniffing on Switched Networks

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use wireshark, the packet sniffing tool.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows PC/Laptop connected to a network
• Wireshark network setup

Procedure
TASK 1: Using Wireshark , a packet-sniffing tool
1 Open Wireshark. If you don’t have the free program for Windows, Mac, and Linux, you can download it from
their website.

2 Navigate to “Edit” and click Preferences. You’ll find “Edit” in the menu bar along the top of the Wireshark
window.

3 Click the Capture tab. It’s in the panel on the left side of the window.

4 Ensure “Capture packets in promiscuous mode” is selected and press OK.

33
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Close the Wireshark Preferences window if it doesn’t close automatically.

6 Click the blue fin icon to start recording. You can also press Ctrl + E. You’ll see a graph that indicates your
network activity.

7 Press the red fin icon to stop recording. You’ll see the previous history in the window at the top of your screen.

8 Click on an instance to see the IP addresses it was going to and coming from as well as additional data.

34
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 11
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 12 : IP Address Spoofing

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• do IP spoofing using Hide.me

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows PC/Laptop connected to internet

Procedure
TASK 1: IP Spoofing using Hide.me
1 Download Hide.me VPN Software and install it.
2 Click “Enable VPN” button to enable the Virtual private network and your ip address will change.

3 Click on “Change” button in the right side of the window to set the country location for the IP Address.
4 Goto Cmd Prompt and type the command “ipconfig” then we will get the latest IP Address.

5 On Click “Details” button in the left side of the window. We are able to see the location is changed to
Netherlands. But our actual location is India.

35
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 13 : DNS Spoofing

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• do DNS spoofing using Ettercap.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop
• Kali Linux OS
• Ettercap

Procedure
TASK 1: DNS Spoofing using Ettercap
1 Start by booting up Kali Linux

Note: before you continue and make sure that you are on the same network as your target.

2 Open the file /etc/ettercap/etter.conf with a text editor like gedit and edit the file.

3 Edit the uid and gid values at the top to make them 0.

4 Remove both the # signs below where it says “if you use iptables”.

36
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Run Ettercap by using Terminal.

6 Select Sniff > Unified sniffing… > (Select the interface connected to the internet) > OK it automatically starts
sniffing after we press OK

7 To scan for targets on your network go to Hosts > Scan for hosts and wait until it does the scan.

8 Go back to Hosts and select Host list to see all the targets that Ettercap has found.

9 Select IP address from the host list in Ettercap and choose Add to Target 1

10 Now select the gateway IP from the host list and choose Add to Target 2.

37
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 13
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

11 Go to the MITM tab and select ARP poisoning, choose Sniff remote connections and press OK.

12 go to Plugins > Manage the plugins and double click dns_spoof to activate that plugin.

13 Edit etter.dns file, This is the hosts file and is responsible for redirecting specific DNS requests.

14 Add another line, use whatever website you would like and change the IP address to your IP address.(Here
example facebook is used).

15 Start Apache to accept incoming traffic.

16 Go to /var/www/html folder and alter index.html page for your needs and save the page.

17 Go back to Ettercap and select Start > Start sniffing and that to start the attack.

38
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 13
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 14 : Password Cracking: Dictionary vs Brute-

Force vs Hybrid methods
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• crack password by using Dictionary Attack method
• crack password by using Brute-Force Attack method
• crack password by using Hybrid Attack method.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Linux PC/Laptop with internet connection
• Password cracking tools John the Ripper,
Hashcat, Hydra

Procedure
Password cracking involves attempting to gain unauthorized access to a system or an account by trying to
decipher or guess the password. There are several methods for password cracking, including dictionary
attacks, brute-force attacks, and hybrid attacks. Here are practical steps for each method:
TASK 1: Dictionary Attack
1 Gather Wordlists: Obtain a comprehensive wordlist or dictionary containing commonly used passwords,
phrases, and combinations.

2 Select Tools: Choose a password cracking tool that supports dictionary attacks, such as John the Ripper,
Hashcat, or Hydra.

3 Configure Tool: Set up the password cracking tool to use the selected wordlist as input.

4 Execute Attack: Run the tool against the target system or account, attempting to log in with each password
in the dictionary.

5 Analyze Results: Review the output to identify successful password guesses and gain access to the target
account.

TASK 2: Brute-Force Attack

1 Determine Password Complexity: Assess the complexity of the target password, including length and
character set.

2 Select Tools: Choose a password cracking tool capable of brute-force attacks, such as John the Ripper,
Hashcat, or Hydra.

3 Configure Tool: Set up the password cracking tool to systematically generate and try all possible
combinations of characters within the specified parameters.

4 Execute Attack: Run the tool against the target system or account, attempting to guess the password
through exhaustive trial and error.

5 Monitor Progress: Monitor the progress of the brute-force attack, as it may take significant time and
computational resources.

6 Analyze Results: Review the output to identify successful password guesses and gain access to the target
account.

39
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Hybrid Attack

1 Combine Wordlists and Brute Force: Create a hybrid wordlist by combining common words, phrases, and
patterns with brute-force-generated strings.

2 Select Tools: Choose a password cracking tool that supports hybrid attacks, such as John the Ripper,
Hashcat, or Hydra.

3 Configure Tool: Set up the password cracking tool to use the hybrid wordlist as input, along with
parameters for brute-force generation.

4 Execute Attack: Run the tool against the target system or account, attempting to guess the password using
both dictionary-based and brute-force methods.

5 Adjust Parameters: Fine-tune the attack parameters based on initial results and feedback to optimize the
cracking process.

6 Analyze Results: Review the output to identify successful password guesses and gain access to the target
account.

7 Additional Considerations:

a Resource Requirements: Password cracking can be resource-intensive, requiring significant

computational power and time, especially for brute-force attacks.

b Legal and Ethical Considerations: Ensure that password cracking activities comply with applicable
laws, regulations, and ethical guidelines.

c Defensive Measures: Implement strong password policies, multi-factor authentication, and other
security measures to protect against password cracking attempts.

40
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 14
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 15 : Handling Denial-of-Service (DoS)

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• handle DoS during a attack
• prevent DoS during the attack.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with network connectivity
• Firewall & VPN

Procedure
TASK 1: Handling DoS During a Attack
1 Identify the Attack: The first step is to recognize a DoS attack. Signs include unusually slow network
performance, website outages, or specific applications being unavailable.

2 Isolate the Attack: Try to isolate the affected system or service to minimize the impact on the entire
network. Firewalls and traffic filtering rules can be helpful here.

3 Activate DDoS Defense Mechanisms: Many network devices like routers have built-in DDoS protection
features. These may include rate limiting, which restricts incoming traffic volume, or blackholing malicious IP
addresses.

4 Contact Your Service Provider: If you suspect a large-scale DDoS attack, especially for businesses or
organizations, your internet service provider (ISP) can offer more advanced mitigation techniques and
resources.

5 Analyze and Adapt: Once the immediate attack subsides, analyze logs and traffic patterns to understand
the attack type. This will help refine your mitigation strategies for future attacks.

TASK 2: Preventing DoS Attacks

1 Plan and Prepare: Develop a DoS incident response plan that outlines roles, responsibilities, and
communication protocols during an attack.

2 Strengthen Network Security: Regularly update firewalls, intrusion detection/prevention systems

(IDS/IPS), and software on all devices.

3 Utilize DDoS Mitigation Services: Consider subscribing to DDoS protection services offered by security
vendors. These services can filter malicious traffic before it reaches your network.

4 Content Delivery Networks (CDNs): CDNs can absorb large traffic spikes and distribute legitimate traffic
more efficiently.

5 Educate Users: Train employees on potential social engineering tactics hackers use to launch DoS attacks
via phishing emails or malware.

NOTE: DoS mitigation strategies depend on the specific attack type and the resources available.

41
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 16 : Using Tools like John the Ripper, Cain &

Abeletc
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use Cain&Abel test
• install John the Ripper pass and cracker tool
• crack password protected zip file using John the Ripper tool.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC with network connectivity
• John the Ripper Password cracker tool
• Operating system, Windows/LInux Cain & Abel
tool setup

Procedure
TASK 1: Using tool Cain &Abel
1 Download the Cain&Abel zip file from any browser.

2 Follow the installation instructions, proceeding by clicking “Next,” accepting the terms, and concluding by
selecting “Finish” at the end.

3 To install this tool, WinPcap also need. Click “Install” and then follow the setup steps as instructed by the
wizard.

4 Click on “Cracker” in Cain&Abel.

42
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Click the option “LM & NTLM Hashes”.

6 Click on the “+” symbol, then select “Import Hashes.” Check the corresponding box and proceed by clicking
“Next.”

7 Choose the account for which you want to crack the password. Right-click on it, then opt for a brute force
attack. Within the attack options, select NTLM hashes.

43
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 16
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

8 Specify the Charset, Password length and then click on “Start”. It will start making combinations and take
some time to crack hashes.

9 Password cracked successfully.

TASK 2: Install John the Ripper Password Cracker

1 Open the terminal in Linux distributions like Ubuntu, Fedora, Arch etc.

2 Run the command sudo apt-get install john.

3 Type Y and press enter to continue the installation.

44
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 16
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Use John the Ripper

1 Open the terminal

2 Type the command john hash.txt --format=RAW-MD5 and hit enter

Note: type john followed by the hash file that you want to crack and then just define the
format of the hash.

TASK 4: Cracking Zip File using John the Ripper

1 Select a zip folder (techofide.zip ) which is password protected and asking for a password to open it.

2 Generate a hash of our zip file using the command sudo zip2john techofide.zip > hash.txt.

3 Use hash of our zip file and apply the command sudo john --format=zip hash.txt to crack the password.

45
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 16
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 17 : Configuring Firewalls

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• setup the windows firewall
• crack firewall settings on the PC.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Windows PC/Laptop with internet connectivity

Procedure
TASK 1: Set Up the Windows Firewall
1 Open the Control Panel.

2 Click the System and Security heading.

3 Click the Windows Firewall heading.

4 The Windows Firewall window appears.

5 To change the setting, click the Turn Windows Firewall “On” or “Off” link on the left side of the Windows
Firewall window.

TASK 2: Checking Firewall Settings on a PC

1 Open your Start menu.

2 Type “firewall” into the search bar.

3 Click the “Windows Firewall” option on the top of the search window.

4 “Private networks” and “Guest or public networks” with green shields to the left of them, signifying that the
firewall is active.

46
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Click the “Advanced Settings” option to alter the following:

a ”Inbound Rules” - Which incoming connections are automatically allowed.

b ”Outbound Rules” - Which outgoing connections are automatically allowed.

c ”Connection Security Rules” - Baselines for which connections your computer will allow and which ones it
will block.

d ”Monitoring” - An overview of your firewall’s basic monitoring guidelines.

6 Exit the Advanced Settings menu when you’re finished.

47
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 17
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

48
CITS : IT&ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 17
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Module 2 : Data base concepts

EXERCISE 18 : Installation Steps of MySQL
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• download MySQL installer
• know about the MySQL installation steps & procedure
• check and verify MySQL by using command prompt.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Operating System: Windows 10 or 11 (64-bit)
• MySQL Setup Software
• Desktop/Laptop will latest configuration

Procedure
Installation Methods
TASK 1 : Download MySQL
Step 1: Go to the official website of MySQL and download the community server edition software. Here, you will
see the option to choose the Operating System, such as Windows.
Step 2: Next, there are two options available to download the setup. Choose the version number for the MySQL
community server, which you want. If you have good internet connectivity, then choose the mysql-installer-web-
community. Otherwise, choose the other one.

TASK 2 :Installing MySQL on Windows

Step 1: After downloading the setup, unzip it anywhere and double click the MSI installer .exe file. It will give the
following screen:
Step 2: In the next wizard, choose the Setup Type. There are several types available, and you need to choose
the appropriate option to install MySQL product and features. Here, we are going to select the Full option and
click on the Next button.
This option will install the following things: MySQL Server, MySQL Shell, MySQL Router, MySQL Workbench,
MySQL Connectors, documentation, samples and examples, and many more.

49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 3: Once we click on the Next button, it may give information about some features that may fail to install on
your system due to a lack of requirements. We can resolve them by clicking on the Execute button that will
install all requirements automatically or can skip them. Now, click on the Next button.

Step 4: In the next wizard, we will see a dialog box that asks for our confirmation of a few products not getting
installed. Here, we have to click on the Yes button.

50
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

After clicking on the Yes button, we will see the list of the products which are going to be installed. So, if we
need all products, click on the Execute button.

Step 5: Once we click on the Execute button, it will download and install all the products. After completing the
installation, click on the Next button.

Step 6: In the next wizard, we need to configure the MySQL Server and Router. Here, I am not going to
configure the Router because there is no need to use it with MySQL. We are going to show you how to
configure the server only. Now, click on the Next button.

51
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 7: As soon as you will click on the Next button, you can see the screen below. Here, we have to configure
the MySQL Server. Now, choose the Standalone MySQL Server/Classic MySQL Replication option and click on
Next. Here, you can also choose the InnoDB Cluster based on your needs.

Step 8: In the next screen, the system will ask you to choose the Config Type and other connectivity options.
Here, we are going to select the Config Type as ‘Development Machine’ and Connectivity as TCP/IP, and Port
Number is 3306, then click on Next.

52
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 9: Now, select the Authentication Method and click on Next. Here, I am going to select the first option.

Step 10: The next screen will ask you to mention the MySQL Root Password. After filling the password details,
click on the Next button.

Step 11: The next screen will ask you to configure the Windows Service to start the server. Keep the default setup
and click on the Next button.

53
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 12: In the next wizard, the system will ask you to apply the Server Configuration. If you agree with this
configuration, click on the Execute button.

Step 13: Once the configuration has completed, you will get the screen below. Now, click on the Finish button to
continue.

54
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 14: In the next screen, you can see that the Product Configuration is completed. Keep the default setting
and click on the Next-> Finish button to complete the MySQL package installation.

Step 15: In the next wizard, we can choose to configure the Router. So click on Next->Finish and then click the
Next button.

Step 16: In the next wizard, we will see the Connect to Server option. Here, we have to mention the root password,
which we had set in the previous steps.

55
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

It is also required to check about the connection is successful or not by clicking on the Check button. If the
connection is successful, click on the Execute button. Now, the configuration is complete, click on Next.
Step 17: In the next wizard, select the applied configurations and click on the Execute button.

Step 18: After completing the above step, we will get the following screen. Here, click on the Finish button.

Step 19: Now, the MySQL installation is complete. Click on the Finish button.

56
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3 : Verify MySQL

After Installation, Open your MySQL Command Line Client; it should have appeared with a mysql> prompt. If
you have set any password, write your password here. Now, you are connected to the MySQL server, and you
can execute all the SQL command at mysql> prompt as follows:
For example: Check the already created databases with show databases command:

MY SQL Installation & Verification Complete.

57
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 18
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 19 : Troubleshooting Basic Installation Issues

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• troubleshoot basic installed issuses in MySQL
• verify installation status
• do advance trouble shooting

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Operating System: Windows 10 or 11 (64-bit)
• MySQL Setup Software
• Desktop/Laptop will latest configuration

Procedure
Troubleshooting Basic Installation Issues in MySQL on Windows:
TASK 1 : Check Error Logs
• Location: The default location for the error log is C:\ProgramData\MySQL\MySQL Server 8.0\data\
mysql.err.
• Analysis: Open the error log and search for specific error messages. Here are some common errors and their
meanings:
• Access denied: Check the root password or permissions related to data directories.
• Port conflicts: Another program might be using the default port (3306). Disable conflicting programs or
change the MySQL port.
• Missing files or directories: Verify that all installation files are present and in the correct locations.
• Configuration errors: Double-check your configuration settings in my.ini based on your specific setup.
TASK 2 : Verify Installation Status
• Open the “Services” app: On Windows 10,
• press Win+R, type services.msc, and press Enter.On Windows 11,
• right-click the Start button, select “Settings”, then “Apps & features”, and scroll down to “Optional features”.
• Under “More Windows features”, click “Add features”. Look for “MySQL Server” and install it if not already
present.
• Check the status: In the “Services” app, locate “MySQL80” (or your version number) and check its status. If
it’s not running, try starting it manually.
TASK 3 : Address Common Issues
• Insufficient Permissions: Ensure the MySQL service has the necessary permissions to access its data
directories and files.
• Antivirus/Firewall Interference: Temporarily disable antivirus or firewall software to see if it’s blocking MySQL.
• Incorrect Data Directory: Verify the data directory path in the my.ini file matches the actual location.
• Missing Visual C++ Redistributables: Install the correct version of Visual C++ Redistributables,
downloadable from Microsoft’s website.

TASK 4 : Advanced Troubleshooting

• Use mysqldump to check data integrity: After successful installation, consider using mysqldump to back up
existing data if possible. If data corruption occurred during installation, you can potentially restore it after
resolving the issue.
• Reinstall MySQL: If all else fails, consider reinstalling MySQL using the latest installer from the official website.
Make sure to back up any existing data you may have.

58
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 20 : Creating and Using a Database in MySQL

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create the database & use it
• create the table and use it & perform insert ,Select,update and delete queries

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Operating System: Windows 10 or 11 (64-bit)
• MySQL Setup Software
• Desktop/Laptop will latest configuration

Procedure
TASK 1 : Creating and Using a Database in MySQL
1 Open the MySQL Command Line Client:
Windows: Search for “MySQL Shell” or “mysql.exe” in the Start menu.
macOS/Linux: Open a terminal and type mysql (if installed globally) or path/to/your/mysql/bin/mysql.

2 Connect to the MySQL

Server: Type mysql -u root -p
Enter your root password when prompted.

59
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Create a Database:
Use the CREATE DATABASE command:
CREATE DATABASE database name;
Replace database name with the desired name for your database (e.g., employeedb).

4 Select the Database:

Use the USE command:
USE database name;
This switches the focus to the newly created database.
5 Create a Table:
Use the CREATE TABLE command:

60
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 20
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

SQL
CREATE TABLE table name (
column1 name data type PRIMARY KEY,
column2 name data type,
column3 name data type,
...
);
Replace:
table name with the desired name for your table (e.g., employee table).
column name with the names of each data column.
data type with the appropriate data type for each column (e.g., INT, VARCHAR, DATE).
PRIMARY KEY specifies the unique identifier for each row (usually an auto-incrementing
INT).

6 Insert Data:
Use the INSERT INTO command:
INSERT INTO table name (column1 name, column2 name, column3 name)
VALUES (value1, value2, value3);
Replace:
table name with the name of your table.
column name with the names of the columns you want to insert data into.
value with the actual data for each column (e.g., numbers, strings, dates).
7 Retrieve Data:
Use the SELECT command:
SELECT * FROM table name;
This retrieves all data from the table.
You can modify the SELECT command to specify specific columns or filter data based on conditions.

61
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 20
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

8 Modify Data:
Use the UPDATE command:
UPDATE table name SET column name = new value WHERE condition;
Replace:
table name with the name of your table.
column name with the name of the column you want to update.
new value with the new data for the column.
condition specifies which rows to update (e.g., WHERE id = 1).

9 Delete Data:
Use the DELETE FROM command:
DELETE FROM table name WHERE condition;
Replace:
table name with the name of your table.
condition specifies which rows to delete (e.g., WHERE age > 30).

62
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 20
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

10 Exit MySQL:
Type exit or quit to disconnect from the server.

63
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 20
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 21 : Designing of Tables

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• connect the MySQL database server
• create database and table
• perform insert,select,delete queries

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Operating System: Windows 10 or 11 (64-bit)
• MySQL Setup Software
• Desktop/Laptop will latest configuration

Procedure
TASK 1 : Creating Table, Insert values and retrieve data from that table
Step 1: Open MySQL Command Line:
Go to the Start menu, find MySQL, and open the MySQL Command Line client.
Step 2: Login to MySQL Server:
Enter the following command and press Enter. Replace username with your MySQL username, and you’ll be
prompted to enter your password.
mysql -u username –p

Step 3: Create a Database:

If you haven’t created a database yet, create one using the following command. Replace yourdatabase with the
desired name for your database.
CREATE DATABASE employeedb;

64
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 4: Switch to the New Database:

Use the following command to switch to the newly created database.
USE employeedb;
Step 5: Design Tables:
Create tables with the desired columns and data types. Here’s an example for a simple “users” table:
CREATE TABLE users (
user id INT AUTO INCREMENT PRIMARY KEY,
username VARCHAR(50) NOT NULL,
email VARCHAR(100) UNIQUE NOT NULL,
password VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL,
created at TIMESTAMP DEFAULT CURRENT TIMESTAMP
);

65
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 21
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 6: Insert Data into the Table:

Once the table is created, you can insert data using the INSERT INTO
statement: INSERT INTO people (id, name, occupation, age)
VALUES (101, ‘Peter’, ‘Engineer’, 32);

Step 7: Retrieve Data from the Table:

Use the SELECT statement to retrieve data from the table:
SELECT * FROM users;
Step 8: Update and Delete Data:
Modify existing data using the UPDATE statement and remove data using the DELETE statement:
UPDATE trainer SET email = ‘[email protected]’ WHERE course name = ‘Java’;

DELETE FROM city WHERE ID = 500;

66
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 21
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 9: Managing Tables:

To see a list of tables in the current database, use the following command:
SHOW TABLES;
To get information about a specific table, you can use:
DESCRIBE yourtable;

Step 10: Exit MySQL Command Line:

When you’re done working in the MySQL Command Line, you can exit by typing:
EXIT;

67
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 21
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Create a table named CSA (Roll No., Stu name, Father Name, DOB, Adress, Phone No., Email) and insert 10
values in it.

68
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 21
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 22 : Applying Data Integrity Rules

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• start MySQL server ans access MySQL
• desine conctraints
• check and verify integrity rules.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : Applying data intergrity rules
1 Start MySQL Server: start the MySQL server. You can do this by going to the Services application in
Windows, finding MySQL service, and starting it.
2 Access MySQL: Open the MySQL command line client or a GUI tool like MySQL Workbench to access your
MySQL server.

3 Define Your Rules

Start by understanding the data relationships and desired constraints. Consider:
Primary Keys: Identify unique identifiers for each table (e.g., product id in a products table).
Foreign Keys: Create references between related tables (e.g., order id in an orders table referencing product id
in the products table).
Data Types: Specify allowed data types for each column (e.g., INT for numbers, VARCHAR for text).
NOT NULL: Mark columns that cannot be empty.
UNIQUE: Ensure specific values appear only once within a column.

69
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

CHECK: Define custom conditions for valid data (e.g., age must be positive).
4 Create a Database: Use the following SQL command to create a new database:
CREATE DATABASE your database name;
Use the Database: Switch to the newly created database using the following command:
USE your database name;
5 Create Tables: Create the tables for which you want to apply data integrity rules. For
example: CREATE TABLE departments (
id INT AUTO INCREMENT PRIMARY KEY,
name VARCHAR(100)
);
CREATE TABLE employees (
id INT AUTO INCREMENT PRIMARY KEY,
name VARCHAR(100),
department id INT,
FOREIGN KEY (department id) REFERENCES departments(id)
);

In this example, the employees table has a foreign key constraint referencing the id column of the departments
table.
6 Insert Data: Insert some data into the tables you’ve created. Make sure to maintain referential
integrity: INSERT INTO departments (name) VALUES (‘HR’), (‘IT’), (‘Finance’);
INSERT INTO employees (name, department id) VALUES (‘John’, 1), (‘Jane’, 2), (‘Doe’, 3);

70
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 22
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

7 Test Data Integrity: Try to insert data that violates the integrity rules you’ve defined. For example, try to
insert an employee with a department id that doesn’t exist:
INSERT INTO employees (name, department id) VALUES (‘Adam’, 10);

You should get an error because the department id 10 doesn’t exist in the departments table.
Update and Delete Data: When updating or deleting data, make sure to maintain referential integrity by updating
or deleting related records appropriately.
Review and Modify Rules: Regularly review your data integrity rules and modify them as necessary to ensure
they continue to meet the requirements of your application.
We can use the graphical interface of phpMyAdmin to manage tables and constraints.

71
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 22
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 23 : Using the DDL, DCL, DML statements

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use DDL statements create,alter and drop
• use DCL statements grant & revoke
• use DML statements insert update delete

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Accessing MySQL:
MySQL Workbench: Download and install the graphical user interface (GUI) for MySQL management.
Command Prompt: Open the Command Prompt and navigate to the MySQL installation directory (e.g., C:\
Program Files\MySQL\MySQL Server 8.0\bin).
Connecting to the Database:
MySQL Workbench: Provide your server hostname, username, password, and database name to connect.
Command Prompt: Use the mysql command followed by your credentials (e.g., mysql -h localhost -u root -p).

TASK 2 :Using DDL (Data Definition Language) Statements:

1 Create a Database:
CREATE DATABASE your database name;
Use the Database:
USE your database name;
Create a Table:
2 CREATE TABLE employees (
id INT AUTO INCREMENT PRIMARY
KEY, name VARCHAR(100),
salary DECIMAL(10, 2)
);
3 Alter Table (Add a Column)
ALTER TABLE employees
ADD COLUMN hire date DATE;

72
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Drop Table:
DROP TABLE employees;

TASK 3 : DCL (Data Control Language) Statements:

1 GRANT: Assigns permissions to users on databases and objects.
GRANT SELECT, INSERT ON customers TO user1@localhost;
2 REVOKE: Removes permissions from users.
If we want to revoke all privileges assign to the user, execute the following statement:
REVOKE ALL, GRANT OPTION FROM john@localhost;
REVOKE INSERT ON customers FROM user1@localhost;

73
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 23
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Create User:
CREATE USER ‘new user’@’localhost’ IDENTIFIED BY ‘user password’;

4 Drop User:
DROP USER ‘new user’@’localhost’;

TASK 4 : Using DML (Data Manipulation Language) Statements:

1 INSERT: Adds new data to a table.
INSERT INTO departments (id, name) VALUES (4, ‘Operation’);

74
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 23
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 UPDATE: Modifies existing data in a table.

UPDATE departments SET name = ‘Operation’ WHERE id = 1;

3 DELETE: Removes data from a table.

DELETE FROM departments WHERE id = 4;
4 Select Data: Retrieve data from the table.
SELECT * FROM employees;

75
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 23
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

SELECT * FROM Departments;

76
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 23
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 24 : Enforcing Constraints, Primary Key and

Foreign Key
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• connect the MySQL database server
• design the table
• create primary & foreign key

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : Access MySQL:
MySQL Workbench: Download and install the user-friendly GUI for database management.
Command Prompt: Open the Command Prompt and navigate to the MySQL installation directory (e.g., C:\
Program Files\MySQL\MySQL Server 8.0\bin).
Connect to your Database:
MySQL Workbench: Enter your server hostname, username, password, and database name to connect.
Command Prompt: Use the mysql command followed by your credentials (e.g., mysql -h localhost -u root -p).

TASK 2 : Design Your Tables:

1 Primary Key: Identify the unique identifier for each table. This column should not allow null values and
should have a unique constraint applied:
product id INT PRIMARY KEY AUTO INCREMENT,
name VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL UNIQUE,
price DECIMAL(8,2) NOT NULL
);
Establish Relationships:
2 Foreign Key: Define references between related tables. The referencing column must match the data type of
the referenced column:
CREATE TABLE orders (
order id INT PRIMARY KEY AUTO INCREMENT,
customer id INT NOT NULL,
product id INT NOT NULL,
FOREIGN KEY (customer id) REFERENCES customers(customer id),
FOREIGN KEY (product id) REFERENCES products(product id)
ON DELETE SET NULL
);

77
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Ensure that each table’s primary key constraint is enforced. MySQL automatically enforces primary key constraints,
preventing the insertion of duplicate keys.
3 ON DELETE/UPDATE Actions: Specify how the database reacts when data in the parent table is modified
(e.g., ON DELETE SET NULL sets foreign key to null, ON DELETE CASCADE deletes related rows).
4 CHECK Constraints: Define custom conditions for valid data (e.g., age must be positive).

78
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 24
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 25 : Adding indices to tables

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• connect the MySQL database server
• create tables in database
• create index on tables.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : Access MySQL:
MySQL Workbench: Download and install the GUI for user-friendly management.
Command Prompt: Open it and navigate to the MySQL installation directory (e.g., C:\Program Files\MySQL\ MySQL
Server 8.0\bin).
Connect to your Database:
MySQL Workbench: Provide your server hostname, username, password, and database name.
Command Prompt: Use the mysql command followed by your credentials (e.g., mysql -h localhost -u root -p).
Identify Columns for Indexing:
Choose columns frequently used in WHERE clauses, ORDER BY, or JOINs. Consider data types and selectivities
(percentage of unique values).
Use the Database:
USE your database name;

TASK 2 :Create a Table:

Let’s assume you have a table called employee:
CREATE TABLE employee (
id INT PRIMARY KEY, name
VARCHAR(100),
department id INT, salary
DECIMAL(10, 2)
);

TASK 3 : Insert Data into the Table:

INSERT INTO employee (id, name, department id, salary)
VALUES (1, ‘John Doe’, 1, 50000.00), (2, ‘Jane Smith’, 2, 60000.00);

79
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

View the Table Structure:

DESC employees;

TASK 4 :Add Index:

Single Column Index-
CREATE INDEX idx department id ON employee (department id);

Multiple Column (Composite) Index-

CREATE INDEX idx department salary ON employee (department id, salary);
View Index Information:
SHOW INDEX FROM employee;

80
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 25
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 5 :Test Query Performance:

Run queries and observe the performance improvement. For example:
SELECT * FROM employee WHERE department id = 1;
Drop Index (Optional):
If needed, you can drop an index:
DROP INDEX idx department id ON employee;
Questions
1 How do I check existing indices on a table?
2 How do I add a simple Index to a column?
3 How do I remove an Index from a table?
4 How can I check the performance improvement after adding an Index?
5 Can I add a unique Index to a column?

81
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 25
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 26 : Simple Select Queries

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• retrive data from the table
• retrive data from the table by using where clause
• retrive data from the table by using aggregate functions.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Using select queries:
1 Select all columns from a table:
SELECT * FROM your table name;

2 Select specific columns from a table:

SELECT column1, column2 FROM your table name;

3 Select with a condition(WHERE clause):

SELECT * FROM your table name WHERE your column name = ‘some value’;

82
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Select with multiple conditions:

SELECT * FROM your table name WHERE condition1 AND condition2;

5 Select with ordering(ORDER BY clause):

SELECT * FROM your table name ORDER BY your column name DESC;
6 Select with a limit:
SELECT * FROM your table name LIMIT 10;
7 Select with a join:
SELECT t1.column1, t2.column2
FROM table1 t1
JOIN table2 t2 ON t1.common column = t2.common column;
8 Select with Aggregate functions (e.g. SUM,
AVG): SELECT AVG(your column name) AS average
value FROM your table name;
SELECT MIN(your column name) AS minimum value
FROM your table name;
1 How to retrieve maximum and minimum values in any particular column?
2 How to retrieve rows based on date range?
3 How to retrieve unique values in any column?

83
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 26
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 27 : Insert, Update and Delete Queries

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create table and insert the value in the table
• update some values in the tables
• delete specific tuples from the table

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Using next query
1 Create database:
Create database database name:
Use database:
Use database name;
2 Create Table:
CREATE TABLE your table name
( column1 datatype1,
column2 datatype2,
column3 datatype3,
-- add more columns as needed
PRIMARY KEY (column1)
);
Ex:
CREATE TABLE `employee` (
`employee id` bigint unsigned NOT NULL AUTO INCREMENT,
`first name` varchar(45) NOT NULL,
`last name` varchar(45) NOT NULL,
`last update` timestamp NOT NULL DEFAULT CURRENT
TIMESTAMP, UNIQUE KEY `employee id` (`employee id`)
);

84
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

To find the structure of a table called employee, you can use the MySQL DESCRIBE command:
DESCRIBE employee;

3 Insert Query: Adding new records to the table

INSERT INTO your table name (column1, column2, column3)
VALUES (‘value1’, ‘value2’, ‘value3’);
Ex: INSERT INTO employee(first name, last name)
VALUES (‘Bob’, ‘Smith’);

For show the records

SELECT * FROM employee;

85
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 27
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Using INSERT to add multiple rows at once

INSERT INTO my table(column name, column name
2) VALUES
(‘value’, ‘value2’),
(‘value3’, ‘value4’),
(‘value5’, ‘value6’);
Ex - INSERT INTO employee(first name, last name)
VALUES
(‘Abigail’, ‘Spencer’),
(‘Tamal’, ‘Wayne’),
(‘Katie’, ‘Singh’),
(‘Felipe’, ‘Espinosa’);

For show the records

SELECT * FROM employee;

TASK 2 : Using update query

Update Query:
UPDATE your table name
SET column1 = ‘new value1’, column2 = ‘new value2’
WHERE condition;

86
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 27
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3 :Using delete query:

Delete Query: to remove rows from tables
DELETE FROM your table name
WHERE condition;
EX - DELETE FROM employee
WHERE first name = ‘Abigail’;

For show the records

SELECT * FROM employee;

The return value here indicates that the DELETE command was processed with a single row being removed.
Using DELETE to remove multiple rows at once

87
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 27
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 You can remove multiple items at once with DELETE by manipulating the selection criteria specified
in the WHERE clause.

For instance, to remove multiple rows by ID, you could type something like this:
Ex - DELETE FROM employee
WHERE employee id in (3,4);

3 You can even leave out the WHERE clause to remove all of the rows from a given table:
DELETE FROM employee;

Questions
1 How can you insert multiple records in a single query?
2 How can you update multiple columns in a single query?
3 How do you delete a specific record from a table?

88
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 27
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 28: Using the Number, Date and Character

Functions
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use the number functions in MySQL
• use the data functions in MySQL
• use the character functions in MySQL

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Using Number Functions:
1 ABS() – Absolute Value:
SELECT ABS(-15);
-- Result: 15
2 ROUND() - Round to specified numbers of decimal places.
SELECT ROUND(123.456, 2);
-- Result: 123.46

3 SUM() – Calculate the sum of the values

SELECT SUM(column name) FROM your table;

89
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2 : Using DATE Functions:

1 NOW() – Current date and time
SELECT NOW();
-- Result: Current date and time
2 DATE FORMAT() – Format a date
SELECT DATE FORMAT(NOW(), ‘%Y-%m-%d’);
-- Result: Formatted date (YYYY-MM-DD)

90
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 28
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 DATEDIFF() – Calculate the difference between two dates

SELECT DATEDIFF(‘2022-01-01’, ‘2021-12-15’);
-- Result: 17 (days)

TASK 3 :Using CHARACTER Functions:

1 CONCATE() – Concatenate strings
SELECT CONCAT(‘Hello’, ‘ ‘, ‘World’);
-- Result: Hello World

2 LENGTH() – Length of a string

SELECT LENGTH(‘abcde’);
-- Result: 5
3 SUBSTRING() – Extract part of a string
SELECT SUBSTRING(‘abcdef’, 2, 3);
-- Result: bcd
1 How do you calculate the difference in days between two date
columns? SELECT DATEDIFF(end date, start date) FROM your table;
2 How can you concatenate two columns and add a separator between them?
SELECT CONCAT(column1, ‘ - ‘, column2) AS concatenated columns FROM your
table;
3 How can you find the length of string column?
SELECT LENGTH(string column) FROM your
table;

91
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 28
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

92
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 28
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 29 : Joins, Group by, Having, Sub query

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use joins in queries
• use group by in queries
• use having & subquery in queries

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Setup & Connect To MySQL:
Make sure you have MySQL installed on your Windows machine. You can use a tool like MySQL Command-
Line Client or a graphical interface like MySQL Workbench.
mysql -u your username –p

Enter your password when prompted.

TASK 2 :Create sample tables and insert values

1 Let’s create two simple tables -
CREATE TABLE employee (
employee id INT PRIMARY
KEY, employee name
VARCHAR(50), department id
INT

93
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 CREATE TABLE department

( department id INT PRIMARY
KEY, department name
VARCHAR(50)
);

3 Insert the values in the tables:

Insert values in Employees table -
INSERT INTO employee VALUES (1, ‘John Doe’, 1);
INSERT INTO employee VALUES (2, ‘Jane Smith’, 2);
INSERT INTO employee VALUES (3, ‘Bob Johnson’, 1);

Insert values in Department table -

INSERT INTO department VALUES (1, ‘HR’);
INSERT INTO department VALUES (2, ‘IT’);

94
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

95
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

96
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

97
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

98
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

99
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

JOIN departments ON employees.department id = departments.id

GROUP BY departments.name;
1 How to retrieve the average salary of employees in each department?
SELECT departments.name AS department, AVG(salary) AS average
salary FROM employees
JOIN departments ON employees.department id = departments.id
GROUP BY departments.name;
2 How to find the employees who earn more than the average salary in their
department? SELECT name, salary
FROM employees
WHERE salary > (
SELECT AVG(salary)
FROM employees AS e2
WHERE e2.department id = employees.department id
);
3 How to retrieve departments with the highest average salary?
SELECT name AS department, AVG(salary) AS average salary
FROM employees
JOIN departments ON employees.department id = departments.id
GROUP BY departments.name
HAVING AVG(salary) =
( SELECT MAX(avg
salary) FROM (
SELECT AVG(salary) AS avg salary
FROM employees
GROUP BY department id
) AS department avg
);

100
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 29
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 30 : Indexing and Optimizing query

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create and use the index
• identify slow queries
• optimize query executive

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : INDEXING:
1 Open MySQL Command Line-
Open the MySQL Command Line or any MySQL client that allows you to execute SQL commands.
2 Connect to your database-
mysql -u your username p
Enter your password when prompted
3 Select Your Database-
USE your database name;
Identify the column to be indexed
Let’s assume you want to create an index on a column named example column in a table named your table.
4 Create the Index-
CREATE INDEX idx example column ON your table(example column);
5 Verify the Index-
SHOW INDEX FROM your table;
This command displays information about the indexes on the specified table. You should see the newly created
index in the output
Example Output –
+--------------+------------+-----------------+--------------+-------------+-----------+-------------+----------+--------+------+-----------
-+---------+--------------+
| Table | Non unique | Key name | Seq in index | Column name | Collation | Cardinality | Sub part | Packed
| Null | Index type | Comment | Index comment |
+--------------+------------+-----------------+--------------+-------------+-----------+-------------+----------+--------+------+-----------
-+---------+--------------+
| your table | 1 | idx example column | 1 | example column | A | 0| NULL | NULL |
YES | BTREE | | |
+--------------+------------+-----------------+--------------+-------------+-----------+-------------+----------+--------+------+-----------
-+---------+--------------+

101
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

In this output, you can see information about the index, including its name (idx example column), the indexed
column (example column), and the index type (BTREE).
Test the query performance
After creating the index, you can test the performance of queries involving the indexed column to see if there is
an improvement in retrieval speed.

TASK 2 : QUERY OPTIMIZATION

Optimizing MySQL queries is crucial for improving database performance. Here are steps you can take to
optimize queries in MySQL on a Windows environment:
1 Identify slow queries-
Open MySQL Command Line or a MySQL client.
Execute the following command to enable the slow query log in your MySQL configuration file (my.ini):
SET GLOBAL slow query log = ‘ON’;
SET GLOBAL slow query log file = ‘C:\\path\\to\\your\\log\\file.log’;
SET GLOBAL long query time = 1;
Replace ‘C:\path\to\your\log\file.log’ with the desired path for your slow query log file. The long query time is set
to 1 second in this example, meaning queries taking longer than 1 second will be logged.
2 Analyze the slow query log:
Execute slow queries in your application or environment.
After some time, check the slow query log for potential issues:
SHOW VARIABLES LIKE ‘slow query log’;
SHOW VARIABLES LIKE ‘slow query log file’;
3 Use EXPLAIN to analyze queries-
Before optimizing, use the EXPLAIN statement to analyze the execution plan of a slow query:
EXPLAIN SELECT * FROM your table WHERE your condition;
Review the output to understand how MySQL is executing the query and identify potential bottlenecks.
4 Add Indexes:
Identify columns used in WHERE, JOIN, or ORDER BY clauses.
Create indexes on these columns to speed up query execution:
CREATE INDEX idx your column ON your table(your column);
Replace idx your column, your table, and your column with appropriate names.
5 Optimize WHERE Clause:
Use appropriate indexing to optimize WHERE clauses.
Avoid using functions or operations in the WHERE clause that prevent the use of indexes.

102
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 30
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 31 : Creating & Using Stored procedure

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• Create a stored procedure
• execute the stored procedure
• drop the stored procedure

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Create and use stored procedure

103
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

104
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 31
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 32 : Creating and executing MySQL table

level Triggers
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create the table level triggers
• use the table level triggers

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Create & execute triggers

105
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

106
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 32
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 33 : Creating Cursors in MYSQL

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create stored procedure with cursor

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 :Create cursors in MySQL

107
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 INSERT SAMPLE DATA –

Insert some sample data into the table:
INSERT INTO example table (data) VALUES (‘Data 1’), (‘Data 2’), (‘Data 3’);
2 Create A Stored Procedure With A Cursor –
Now, create a stored procedure that uses a cursor to iterate through the rows and display the data:
DELIMITER //
CREATE PROCEDURE IterateExampleTable()
BEGIN
DECLARE done BOOLEAN DEFAULT FALSE;
DECLARE data value VARCHAR(255);
-- Declare a cursor for the table
DECLARE cursor example CURSOR FOR
SELECT data FROM example table;
-- Declare an exit handler to close the cursor when no more rows are found
DECLARE CONTINUE HANDLER FOR NOT FOUND SET done = TRUE;
-- Open the cursor
OPEN cursor example;
-- Start looping through the rows
cursor loop: LOOP
-- Fetch the next row into data value
FETCH cursor example INTO data value;
-- Check if we have reached the end of the cursor
IF done THEN
LEAVE cursor loop;
END IF;
-- Output the current row data
SELECT data value AS OutputData;
END LOOP;
-- Close the cursor
CLOSE cursor example;
END //
DELIMITER ;

108
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 33
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

109
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 33
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 34 : Using Cursors in MySQL

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create a stored procedure with cursor
• use the cursors in MySQL

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : Using a cursor in MySQL

110
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

111
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 34
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

112
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 34
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 35 : Implementing MySQL Security

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• secure MySQL database

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : The process of securing MySQL.

113
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

114
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 35
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 36 : Simple application on database using

SP, Triggers, Cursors & Indexing

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create simple application on database using SP Triggers cursors & indexing

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• Operating system: window 10:11
• XAMPP server r3.3.0

Procedure
TASK 1 : Creating a simple application using stored procedures, triggers, cursors, and indexing in MySQL
1 CREATE DATABASE –
CREATE DATABASE library db;
USE library db;
2 CREATE TABLES –
Create table books and users -
CREATE TABLE books (
book id INT PRIMARY KEY AUTO INCREMENT,
title VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL,
author VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL,
quantity INT NOT NULL
);
CREATE TABLE users (
user id INT PRIMARY KEY AUTO INCREMENT,
name VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL,
email VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL
);
3 INSERT VALUES –
INSERT INTO books (title, author, quantity) VALUES
(‘Book 1’, ‘Author 1’, 5),
(‘Book 2’, ‘Author 2’, 8),
(‘Book 3’, ‘Author 3’, 3);
INSERT INTO users (name, email) VALUES
(‘User 1’, ‘[email protected]’),
(‘User 2’, ‘[email protected]’);

115
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 STORED PROCEDURE –
DELIMITER //
CREATE PROCEDURE GetBooksByAuthor(IN authorName VARCHAR(255))
BEGIN
SELECT * FROM books WHERE author = authorName;
END //
DELIMITER ;
TRIGGER –
DELIMITER //
CREATE TRIGGER AfterBookBorrowed
AFTER INSERT ON borrowed books
FOR EACH ROW
BEGIN
UPDATE books
SET quantity = quantity - 1
WHERE book id = NEW.book
id;
END //
DELIMITER ;
5 CURSOR –
DELIMITER //
CREATE PROCEDURE DisplayBooksAndQuantities()
BEGIN
DECLARE done INT DEFAULT FALSE;
DECLARE book title VARCHAR(255);
DECLARE book quantity INT;
DECLARE books cursor CURSOR FOR
SELECT title, quantity FROM books;
DECLARE CONTINUE HANDLER FOR NOT FOUND SET done = TRUE;
OPEN books cursor;
read loop: LOOP
FETCH books cursor INTO book title, book
quantity; IF done THEN
LEAVE read loop;
END IF;
SELECT CONCAT(book title, ‘: ‘, book quantity) AS BookInfo;
END LOOP;
CLOSE books cursor;
END //
DELIMITER ;

116
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 36
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 INDEXING –
CREATE INDEX idx email ON users(email);
7 TESTING –
-- Test Stored Procedure
CALL GetBooksByAuthor(‘Author 1’);
-- Test Trigger (Assuming you have a ‘borrowed books’ table)
INSERT INTO borrowed books (user id, book id) VALUES (1,
1);
-- Test Cursor
CALL DisplayBooksAndQuantities();
-- Test Indexing
SELECT * FROM users WHERE email = ‘[email protected]’;
Question
1 How would you call the InsertUser stored procedure to add a new user with the username “nsti” and email
“[email protected]” to the database?
2 Explain the purpose of the before insert user trigger. How does it modify the incoming data before insertion
into the users table?
3 What does the DisplayUsers procedure do, and how would you execute it to see the details of all users in
the users table?
4 Describe the purpose of the idx username index on the users table. How does it improve query performance?

117
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 36
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Module 3 : Introduction to JAVA Script

EXERCISE 37 : Using the JAVA Script Syntax
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create javascriptcode as in line style
• use external javascript files in HTML.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

118
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

119
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 37
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 38 : Using Variables, Operators and Writing

Expressions

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• crease variables
• use operators
• use operators

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Using Variables
I Declaring variables and assigning values
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Declaring variables and assigning values </title>
</head>
<body>
<script>
// Declaring variables
let x; // Declaration without initialization
let y = 5; // Declaration with initialization
// Assigning values to variables
x = 10;
// Printing variables
console.log(“Value of x:”, x); // Output: 10
console.log(“Value of y:”, y); // Output: 5
// Reassigning variables
x = 20;
y = 8;
console.log(“Updated value of x:”, x); // Output: 20

120
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

121
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

122
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

123
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

124
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

125
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

126
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

127
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

128
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Save the program as a .html file

2 Open the html file with a web browser
3 Go to the browsers console tab and verify the output.
1 How do you declare and initialize variables in JavaScript, and what are some best practices for naming
conventions and variable declaration?
2 Declare a variable without initializing it in JavaScript? If so, what value does it hold by default check it?
3 Provide examples demonstrating the difference of var, let, and const type of variable declaration.
4 Write JavaScript code that calculates the area of a rectangle and a circle. Declare appropriate variables
for the length, width (rectangle), and radius (circle). Use appropriate formulas to calculate the area and
display the results with clear labels (e.g., “Area of rectangle: “, “Area of circle: “).
5 Write JavaScript code that converts a temperature value from Celsius to Fahrenheit. Declare a variable
for the temperature in Celsius. Use the formula (Celsius * 9/5) + 32 to convert the temperature and store
the result in a new variable. Display the original temperature in Celsius and the converted temperature in
Fahrenheit with appropriate labels.
6 Create a JavaScript program that converts time between different units (e.g., seconds to minutes, hours
to days).
7 Use the ternary operator to check if the entered age is greater than or equal to 18. If it is, display “You
are eligible for voting,” otherwise display “You are not eligible for voting.”
8 Develop a JavaScript program, in which enter the total purchase amount and whether they have a
discount coupon (true/false). Use logical operators to calculate and display the final amount after applying
the discount.
9 Write a JavaScript program that prompts the user to enter their score for two different exams. Use
comparison operators to determine which exam score is higher and display a message indicating which
exam the user performed better in.
10 Provide examples demonstrating modulus operators (%) usage and practical applications.
11 Provide examples of unary operators commonly used in arithmetic expressions.

129
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 38
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 39 : Programming with Control Flow statements

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use different types if conditional statements
• use different types of loop statements.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Using if statement
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> if statement </title>
</head>
<body>
<script>
let age = 20;
if (age >= 18)
{
console.log(“You are eligible to vote.”);
}
</script>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Go to the browsers console tab and verify the output.

130
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

131
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

132
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

133
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

134
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

135
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

136
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

137
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

138
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

139
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Write a JavaScript program that takes a person’s age as input and determines whether they are eligible for
voting. If the age is 18 or above, the function should return “Eligible for voting,” otherwise, it should return
“Not eligible for voting.” Use if-else statements to implement the logic
2 Develop a JavaScript program that takes a year as input and determines whether it is a leap year or not. If
the year is divisible by 4 but not by 100, or if it is divisible by 400, it is considered a leap year.
3 Write a JavaScript program that takes two numbers as input and display the maximum of the two. Use if-else
statements to implement the comparison.
4 Create a JavaScript program that takes a number representing a month (1 for January, 2 for February, etc.)
and prints the corresponding season. Consider the following mappings: 1-3 (Winter), 4-6 (Spring), 7-9
(Summer), 10-12 (Fall). Use if-else-if statements to implement this logic.
5 Create a JavaScript program that takes a student’s score as input and determines their grade. If the score is
greater than or equal to 90, assign the grade ‘A’; if between 80 and 89, assign ‘B’; if between 70 and 79,
assign ‘C’; if between 60 and 69, assign ‘D’; otherwise, assign ‘F’. By Using if-else-if statements.
6 Write a JavaScript program that takes three numbers as input and determines the largest among them.
However, if two or more numbers are equal, display a message indicating that there is a tie, using nested if-
else statements.
7 Write a JavaScript program that takes a grade (A, B, C, D, F) as input and shows message indicating the
corresponding description (excellent, good, average, poor, fail). Use a switch statement to implement this
logic.
8 Create a JavaScript program that takes a month’s number (1 for January, 2 for February, etc.) as input and
returns the name of the month. Use a switch statement to implement this logic.
9 Develop a JavaScript program that generates the Fibonacci sequence up to a given number of terms using
a for loop. The Fibonacci sequence starts with 0 and 1, and each subsequent number is the sum of the two
preceding ones.
10 Write a JavaScript program that takes a number and then prints its multiplication table up to 10 using a for loop.
11 Create a JavaScript program that takes a positive integer as input and determines whether it is a prime
number or not. Use a while loop to implement the prime number checking algorithm.
12 Write a JavaScript program that calculates the sum of digits of a given number. Use a while loop to extract
digits one by one until the number becomes zero, and accumulate the sum.
13 Develop a JavaScript program that calculates the factorial of a given number using a do-while loop. The
factorial of a number n is the product of all positive integers less than or equal to n.

140
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 39
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 40 : Creating and using Objects in JavaScript

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create objects
• use document object model.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Creating an Object
I Using Object Literal Notation
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Object Literal Notation </title>
</head>
<body>
<script>
// Creating an object using object literal notation var
person = {
firstName: “John”,
lastName: “Doe”,
age: 30,
fullName: function() {
return this.firstName + “ “ + this.lastName;
}
};
// Accessing object properties and methods
console.log(person.firstName); // Output: John
console.log(person.lastName); // Output: Doe
console.log(person.age); // Output: 30
console.log(person.fullName()); // Output: John Doe
</script>
</body>
</html>

141
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

142
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 40
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

143
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 40
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

144
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 40
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

145
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 40
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 41 : Creating and using Functions

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create user defined functions
• create Anonymus functions

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Creating a Function
I Function without parameters
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Function without parameters </title>
</head>
<body>
<script>
// Defining a function named “greet” without any parameters
function greet()
{
// Inside the function, logging a greeting message to the console
console.log(“Hello, world!”);
}
// Calling the function
greet(); // Output: Hello, world!
</script>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Go to the browsers console tab and verify the output.

146
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

147
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 41
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

148
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 41
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

149
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 41
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

150
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 41
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 42 : Using Java Script with Forms

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use HTML forms with javascript
• validate HTML form using javascript
• create Dynamic form elements.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Simple Form Submission
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<head></head>
<body>
<form id=”myForm”>
<label for=”username”>Username:</label>
<input type=”text” id=”username” name=”username”>
<button type=”submit”>Submit</button>
</form>
<script>
const form = document.getElementById(“myForm”);
form.addEventListener(“submit”, handleSubmit);
function handleSubmit(event) {
event.preventDefault();
const username = document.getElementById(“username”).value;
console.log(“Submitted username:”, username);
}
</script>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Enter a text in the textbox and press submit button.
6 Go to the browsers console tab and verify the output.

151
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

152
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 42
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

153
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 42
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Write a JavaScript program that validates an email input field in a form to ensure it is in a valid email format
(e.g., contains “@” and “.”). Display an error message if the email format is invalid.
2 Create a JavaScript program that implements form validation for a password input field. Validate the
password to ensure it meets certain criteria, such as minimum length and inclusion of special characters.
Display an error message if the password does not meet the criteria.
3 Write a JavaScript program that dynamically adds input fields (e.g., text input, select dropdown) to a form
when a button is clicked.
4 Create a JavaScript program that dynamically removes input fields from a form when a button is clicked,
based on user interaction or condition.
5 Create a JavaScript program that disables a form submit button until all required fields in the form are filled.
Enable the submit button only when all required fields are filled.

154
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 42
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 43 : Creating Cookies with JavaScript

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create cookies using javascript
• display cookie details using javascript
• delete a cookie using javascript.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

155
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

156
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 43
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

157
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 43
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

158
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 43
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 44 : Creating CSS

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use css in HTML page
• manipulate the style property of HTML elements using javascript.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

159
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

160
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

161
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

162
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 6: Using External Stylesheet I

create an external stylesheet
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
/* styles.css */ body
{
font-family: Arial, sans-serif;
background-color: #f0f0f0;
color: #333;
}
h1 {
color: #007bff;
}
.container
{ width:
80%;
margin: 0 auto; padding:
20px; background-
color: #fff; border-
radius: 5px;
box-shadow: 0 0 10px rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
}
p{
line-height: 1.6;
}
3 Save the coding as a style.css file
II Link the css file in HTML
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<head>
<meta charset=”UTF-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0”>
<title>External CSS Example</title>
<link rel=”stylesheet” href=”styles.css”>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container”>
<h1>Welcome to my website</h1>
<p>This is a paragraph with some text.</p>
</div>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Verify the output.

163
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

164
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

165
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

166
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

167
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

168
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 44
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 45 : Error Handling in JavaScript

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• handle error using try - catch
• handle error using try - catch and throw
• handle error using try - catch finally.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Error Handling using try-catch
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Object Literal Notation </title>
</head>
<body>
<script>
try
{
// Code that may throw an error let
x = 1;
let y = x + z; // z is not defined, this will throw an error
}
catch (error)
{
// Handle the error
console.error(“An error occurred:”, error.message);
}
</script>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Go to the browsers console tab and verify the output.

169
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

170
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 45
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

171
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 45
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

172
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 45
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 46 : Implementing an AJAX application

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• handle AJAX request
• update HTML page content dynamically

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop / Laptop with latest configuration
• Text editor
• Web browser
• Apache web server

Procedure
TASK 1: Implementation an AJAX application
I Create a JavaScript file to handle the AJAX request and update the content dynamically.
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
// Get references to the button and content container
const loadButton = document.getElementById(‘loadButton’);
const contentContainer = document.getElementById(‘contentContainer’);
// Function to load content asynchronously
function loadContent() {
// Create a new XMLHttpRequest object const
xhr = new XMLHttpRequest();
// Define the callback function to handle the response xhr.onreadystatechange
= function() {
// Check if the request is complete and successful
if (xhr.readyState === XMLHttpRequest.DONE && xhr.status === 200) {
// Update the content container with the response text
contentContainer.innerHTML = xhr.responseText;
}
};
// Open a GET request to the desired URL
xhr.open(‘GET’, ‘example.txt’, true);
// Send the request xhr.send();
}
// Add an event listener to the button to trigger the AJAX request
loadButton.addEventListener(‘click’, loadContent);

173
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

174
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 46
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Module 4 : PHP (Hyper Text Pre Processor)

EXERCISE 47 : Demonstrate on- Paginators, popovers,
progress, spinner
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use paginators & popoves in HTML
• use progress bars in HTML
• use spinners in HTML.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• web browser
• Internet connection

Procedure
TASK 1: Using Paginators
1 create a basic pagination
• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta charset=”utf-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css” rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-3”>
<h2>Pagination </h2>
<p>a basic pagination</p>
<ul class=”pagination”>
<li class=”page-item”><a class=”page-link” href=”#”>Previous</a></li>
<li class=”page-item”><a class=”page-link” href=”#”>1</a></li>
<li class=”page-item”><a class=”page-link” href=”#”>2</a></li>
<li class=”page-item”><a class=”page-link” href=”#”>3</a></li>
<li class=”page-item”><a class=”page-link” href=”#”>Next</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
</body>
</html>

175
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

176
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

177
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

178

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

179
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

180

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Positioning Popovers
• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta charset=”utf-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”>
</script>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-5”>
<h3>Popover Positioning</h3>
<p>Click on the links to see the popover in action:</p>
<p>popover on top and bottom</p>
<br/><br/><br/><br/>
<a href=”#” title=”Header” data-bs-toggle=”popover” data-bs-placement=”top”
data-bs-content=”Content”>Top</a>
<a href=”#” title=”Header” data-bs-toggle=”popover” data-bs-placement=”bottom”
data-bs-content=”Content”>Bottom</a>
</div>
<br/><br/><br/>
<div class=”container mt-5”>
<h3>Popover Positioning</h3>
<p>Click on the links to see the popover in action:</p>
<p>popover on left and right side </p>
<a href=”#” title=”Header” data-bs-toggle=”popover” data-bs-placement=”left”
data-bs-content=”Content”>Left</a>
<a href=”#” title=”Header” data-bs-toggle=”popover” data-bs-placement=”right”
data-bs-content=”Content”>Right</a>
</div>
<script>
var popoverTriggerList = [].slice.call(document.querySelectorAll(‘[data-bs-toggle=”popover”]’))
var popoverList = popoverTriggerList.map(function (popoverTriggerEl) {
return new bootstrap.Popover(popoverTriggerEl)
})
</script>
</body>
</html>
• Save the program as a .html file
• Open the html file with a web browser
• Verify the output.

181
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

182

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

183
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Coloured Progress Bars

• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta charset=”utf-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>
<!-- Blue -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar” style=”width:10%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Green -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-success” style=”width:20%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Turquoise -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-info” style=”width:30%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Orange -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-warning” style=”width:40%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Red -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-danger” style=”width:50%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- White -->
<div class=”progress border”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-white” style=”width:60%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Grey -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-secondary” style=”width:70%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Light Grey -->
<div class=”progress border”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-light” style=”width:80%”></div>
</div><br>
<!-- Dark Grey -->
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-dark” style=”width:90%”></div>
</div><br>
</body>
</html>

184

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

185
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Multiple Progress Bars

• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta charset=”utf-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>
<br/>
<div class=”progress”>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-success” style=”width:40%”>
Free Space
</div>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-warning” style=”width:10%”>
Warning
</div>
<div class=”progress-bar bg-danger” style=”width:20%”>
Danger
</div>
</div>
</body>
</html>
• Save the program as a .html file
• Open the html file with a web browser
• Verify the output.

TASK 4: Using Spinners

1 Create a spinner/loader
• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-3”>

186

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

187
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

188

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 47

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 48 : Demonstrateon Table, toasts, tooltips

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use bootstrap tables in HTML
• use bootstrap toasts in HTML
• use bootstrap tooltips in HTML.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• web browser
• Internet connection

Procedure
TASK 1: Using Table
1 Create a basic Bootstrap 5 table
• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta charset=”utf-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css” rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-3”>
<h2>Table</h2>
<table class=”table”>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>Firstname</th>
<th>Lastname</th>
<th>Email</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>John</td>
<td>Doe</td>
<td>[email protected]</td>

189
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mary</td>
<td>Moe</td>
<td>[email protected]</td>
</tr>
</tbody>

190

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

191
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

192

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Table with Hover Rows

• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<title>Bootstrap Example</title>
<meta charset=”utf-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1”>
<link href=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css” rel=”stylesheet”>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-3”>
<h2> Hover Rows </h2>
<table class=”table table-bordered”>
<thead>
<tr>
<th>Firstname</th>
<th>Lastname</th>
<th>Email</th>
</tr>
</thead>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>John</td>
<td>Doe</td>
<td>[email protected]</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mary</td>
<td>Moe</td>
<td>[email protected]</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>July</td>
<td>Dooley</td>
<td>[email protected]</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
</body>
</html>
• Save the program as a .html file
• Open the html file with a web browser
• Verify the output.

193
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

194

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

195
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

196

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

197
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 48
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 49 : Demonstrate on Bootstrap Styling

essentials like Breakpoints for
components, layouts and grid systems.
Practice on typography, floats, flex,
alignment, borders, position of elements,
shadow and visibility
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use bootstrap break point components,layouts and grid systerms in HTML
• use bootsrap typography, floats,flex,and alignment in HTML
• use bootsrap borders,position of elements and shadow & visibility in HTML.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Desktop/Laptop with latest configuration
• web browser
• Internet connection

Procedure
TASK 1: Applying Breakpoints to Components
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<meta charset=”UTF-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0”>
<title>Bootstrap Breakpoints</title>
<!-- Bootstrap CSS -->
<link href=https://maxcdn.bootstrapcdn.com/bootstrap/4.5.2/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
<style>
/* Additional custom styles */
.custom-component
{ background-color:
lightblue; padding: 20px;
margin-bottom: 20px;
}
</style>
<!-- Bootstrap JS (optional) -->
<script src=”https://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/jquery/3.5.1/jquery.min.js”></script>
<script src=”https://cdnjs.cloudflare.com/ajax/libs/popper.js/1.16.0/umd/popper.min.js”></script>
<script src=”https://maxcdn.bootstrapcdn.com/bootstrap/4.5.2/js/bootstrap.min.js”></script>
</head>
<body>

198
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

199
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

200

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2: Applying layouts and grid systems

1 Open the text editor

2 Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<meta charset=”UTF-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0”>
<title>Bootstrap v3 Layouts and Grid Systems Example</title>
<!-- Bootstrap CSS -->
<link href=https://maxcdn.bootstrapcdn.com/bootstrap/3.4.1/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container”>
<div class=”row”>
<div class=”col-md-4”>
<div class=”well”>Column 1</div>
</div>
<div class=”col-md-4”>
<div class=”well”>Column 2</div>
</div>
<div class=”col-md-4”>
<div class=”well”>Column 3</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class=”row”>
<div class=”col-md-6”>
<div class=”well”>Column 1</div>
</div>
<div class=”col-md-6”>
<div class=”well”>Column 2</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class=”row”>
<div class=”col-md-8”>
<div class=”well”>Column 1</div>
</div>
<div class=”col-md-4”>
<div class=”well”>Column 2</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class=”row”>
<div class=”col-md-3”>
<div class=”well”>Column 1</div>
</div>
<div class=”col-md-6”>
<div class=”well”>Column 2</div>
</div>
<div class=”col-md-3”>

201
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

202

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Practice on typography

1 Open the text editor

2 Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<meta charset=”UTF-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0”>
<title>Bootstrap v5 Typography Example</title>
<link href=https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css rel=”stylesheet”>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-5”>
<h1>Typography Example</h1>
<h2>Headings</h2>
<h1 class=”display-1”>Display 1</h1>
<h2 class=”display-2”>Display 2</h2>
<h3 class=”display-3”>Display 3</h3>
<h4 class=”display-4”>Display 4</h4>
<h5 class=”display-5”>Display 5</h5>
<h6 class=”display-6”>Display 6</h6>
<h2>Text Styles</h2>
<p class=”lead”>This is a lead paragraph.</p>
<p>This is a regular paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-muted”>This is a muted paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-primary”>This is a primary-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-secondary”>This is a secondary-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-success”>This is a success-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-danger”>This is a danger-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-warning”>This is a warning-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-info”>This is an info-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-light bg-dark”>This is a light-colored paragraph on a dark background.</p>
<p class=”text-dark”>This is a dark-colored paragraph.</p>
<p class=”text-body”>This is a paragraph using the body text color.</p>
<p class=”text-reset”>This is a paragraph with reset color.</p>
<h2>Text Alignment</h2>
<p class=”text-start”>Left aligned text.</p>
<p class=”text-center”>Center aligned text.</p>
<p class=”text-end”>Right aligned text.</p>
</div>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”>
</script>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Verify the output.

203
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

204

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

205
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

206

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 6: Using alignment

1 Open the text editor

2 Write the following codes
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html lang=”en”>
<head>
<meta charset=”UTF-8”>
<meta name=”viewport” content=”width=device-width, initial-scale=1.0”>
<title>Bootstrap v5 Alignment Example</title>
<link href=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]
alpha1/dist/css/bootstrap.min.css” rel=”stylesheet”>
</head>
<body>
<div class=”container mt-5”>
<h1>Alignment Example</h1>
<h2>Vertical Alignment</h2>
<div class=”d-flex align-items-start mb-3”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-info”>Start aligned</div>
</div>
<div class=”d-flex align-items-center mb-3”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-success”>Center aligned</div>
</div>
<div class=”d-flex align-items-end”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-warning”>End aligned</div>
</div>
<h2>Horizontal Alignment</h2>
<div class=”d-flex justify-content-start mb-3”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-danger”>Start aligned</div>
</div>
<div class=”d-flex justify-content-center mb-3”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-primary”>Center aligned</div>
</div>
<div class=”d-flex justify-content-end”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-secondary”>End aligned</div>
</div>
<h2>Self-Alignment (Individual Item Alignment)</h2>
<div class=”d-flex align-items-start”>
<div class=”p-2 bg-info align-self-start”>Start aligned</div>
<div class=”p-2 bg-success align-self-center”>Center aligned</div>
<div class=”p-2 bg-warning align-self-end”>End aligned</div>
</div>
</div>
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program as a .html file
4 Open the html file with a web browser
5 Verify the output.

207
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

208

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

209
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<div class=”container”>
<div class=”row mt-5”>
<div class=”col”>
<h2>Positioning Example</h2>
<p>This is a simple example demonstrating how to use Bootstrap v5 classes for positioning elements.</p>
<div class=”position-relative bg-light p-3 mb-3”>
<div class=”position-absolute top-0 start-0 bg-primary p-2”> Top
Left
</div>
<div class=”position-absolute top-0 end-0 bg-success p-2”> Top
Right
</div>
</div>
<div class=”position-relative”>
<img src=”https://via.placeholder.com/400” alt=”Placeholder Image” class=”img-fluid”>
<div class=”position-absolute top-0 start-50 translate-middle-x bg-info p-2”>
Center Top
</div>
<div class=”position-absolute bottom-0 start-50 translate-middle-x bg-secondary p-2”> Center
Bottom
</div>
</div>
<div class=”position-relative bg-light p-3 mb-3”>
<div class=”position-absolute bottom-0 start-0 bg-warning p-2”>
Bottom Left
</div>
<div class=”position-absolute bottom-0 end-0 bg-danger p-2”>Bottom Right
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<!-- Bootstrap Bundle with Popper -->
<script src=”https://cdn.jsdelivr.net/npm/[email protected]/dist/js/bootstrap.bundle.min.js”></script>
</body>
</html>
1 Save the program as a .html file
2 Open the html file with a web browser
3 Verify the output.

210

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

211
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

212

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 49

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 50 : Perform Installation of Apache Web

Server Practice simple PHP programs.
Practicing on programming to test events

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• perform installation of apache webserver
• perform installation of PHP
• configure apache webserver to run PHP as a module.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apsssache web server • seb browser

213
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

214

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

215
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

216

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

217
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

218

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

219
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

220

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

221
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

222

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

223
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

224

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

225
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 50
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 51 : Demonstrate on if statement Using the

else clause with if statement, switch
statement Using the? operator, while
statement, do while statement, for
statement, Breaking out of loops, Nesting
loops
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use if-else and while statement in PHP
• use while and for loops in PHP
• use ? operator and nesting loops in PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Using If statement
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
$age = 21;
if ($age>18)
{
echo “You are eligible for DL”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

226
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

227
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

228

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

229
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

230

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

231
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

232

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

233
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Create a PHP if statement to determine whether a variable $temperature is greater than 30 degrees
Celsius then display “It’s hot outside!”
2 Create a PHP program that determines whether a student has passed or failed an exam based on
their score. If the score is greater than or equal to 60, display a “Pass” message; otherwise, display a
“Fail” message.
3 Write a PHP if statement to determine if a variable $num is divisible by 2 and 3. If it is, echo “The number
is divisible by both 2 and 3”, otherwise echo “The number is not divisible by both 2 and 3”.
4 Write a PHP switch statement that checks the value of a variable $dayOfWeek and echoes “It’s a
weekday” for Monday to Friday, and “It’s a weekend” for Saturday and Sunday.
5 Write a PHP switch statement to determine the discount percentage based on the quantity of items
purchased. If the quantity is 1-10, apply a 5% discount, if it’s 11-20, apply a 10% discount, and if it’s over
20, apply a 15% discount.
6 Write a PHP ternary operator statement to determine if a given number stored in $num is even or odd,
and echo “Even” if it’s even, otherwise echo “Odd”.
7 Write a PHP while loop that calculates the factorial of a given number $n and echoes the result.
8 Create a PHP while loop that generates Fibonacci numbers until reaching a value greater than 1000,
and echoes each Fibonacci number.
9 Create a PHP for loop to generate multiples of 2 and 3 in between 1 and 100, and echoes each number.
10 Write a PHP script using nested for loops to create a simple multiplication table (e.g., 1x1=1, 1x2=2, ...,
5x5=25).
11 Create a script with nested for loops. The outer loop iterates 3 times, and the inner loop iterates 5 times.
Inside the inner loop, use break to exit the entire loop structure (both inner and outer) if the current iteration
number in the inner loop reaches 3.

234

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 51

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 52 : Demonstrate on Function and returning

value from function, user defined
functions, dynamic functions, variable
scope, accessing variable with the
global statement, Function calls with the
static statement, setting default values
for arguments, Passing arguments to a
function by value, Passing arguments
to a function by reference, Testing for
function existence
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create and use user defined functions in PHP
• check different variable scope in PHP
• test the existence of function in PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browsers

Procedure
TASK 1: Create user defined functions
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
function writeMsg()
{
echo “Hello world!”;
}
writeMsg();
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

235
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

236

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

237
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

238

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

239
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

240

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

241
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

242

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Write a function named calculateArea that calculates the area of a rectangle given its length and width.
2 Write a PHP function that takes two numbers as parameters ($num1 and $num2) and print their sum. Call the
function with different values and print result.
3 Create a function called sayHello that takes a parameter $name and defaults to “Guest” if no value is
provided. The function should echo “Hello, $name!”. Call the function without providing a value for $name
and observe the output.
4 Create a function named getAgeCategory that determines the age category based on the provided age. It
should take one parameter $age with a default value of 25. The function should return “Child” for ages 0-12,
“Teen” for ages 13-19, “Adult” for ages 20-59, and “Senior” for ages 60 and above.
5 Create a function called incrementByReference that takes an integer parameter $num by reference and
increments it by 1 inside the function. Call the function with a variable and observe its value change after the
function call.
6 Implement a function called swapValues that takes two variables $a and $b by reference and swaps their
values inside the function. Call the function with two variables and print their values before and after the
function call to demonstrate the swap.
7 Write a PHP script that defines a dynamic function named multiply which takes two parameters and returns
their product. Then, call this dynamic function with values 5 and 3, and echo the result.

243
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 52
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 53 : Demonstratethe Writing to the browser,

Getting input from forms, Output buffering,
Common math, Random numbers, File
upload, File download, Environment
variables

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• write content to the browser using PHP
• check common math and random number functions in PHP
• upload download from server using PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Writing to the browser
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Example with echo
echo “Hello, world!”;

// Example with print

print “This is also displayed”;

// Example with printf

$name = “Alice”;
printf(“Welcome, %s!”, $name);

// Example with sprintf

$message = sprintf(“You have %d unread messages.”, 3);
echo $message;

// Declare variable and store the string

$output = “A computer science portal”;
echo “<script>console.log(‘Value of variable: “ . $output . “’ );</script>”;
?>

244
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

245
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Getting input from forms

1 Create a HTML form
• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<html >
<head>

<title>Form Example</title>
</head>
<body>

<form action=”process.php” method=”post”>

<label for=”name”>Name:</label>
<input type=”text” name=”name” id=”name” required>

<label for=”email”>Email:</label>
<input type=”email” name=”email” id=”email” required>

<input type=”submit” value=”Submit”>

</form>
</body>
</html>
• Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as index.html

246

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Do something with the data (e.g., display it)

echo “Name: $name<br>”;
echo “Email: $email”;
}
else
{
// Redirect or display an error if someone tries to access this script directly

247
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

248

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<body>
<form action=”upload.php” method=”post” enctype=”multipart/form-data”>
<label for=”file”>Select a file:</label>
<input type=”file” name=”file” id=”file” required>
<br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Upload File”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
• Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as index.html
2 Create PHP Script to Handle Upload
• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// upload.php

if ($_SERVER[“REQUEST_METHOD”] == “POST”)
{
// Check if the file was uploaded without errors
if (isset($_FILES[“file”]) && $_FILES[“file”][“error”] == 0)
{
$allowedTypes = [‘jpg’, ‘jpeg’, ‘png’, ‘gif’, ‘txt’];
$maxSize = 5 * 1024 * 1024; // 5 MB

$targetDir = “uploads/”; //create a folder in this name in your php file saved location .
$targetFile = $targetDir . basename($_FILES[“file”][“name”]);
$fileExtension = strtolower(pathinfo($targetFile, PATHINFO_EXTENSION));

// Check file type

if (!in_array($fileExtension, $allowedTypes))
{
echo “Error: Invalid file type.”;
}
elseif ($_FILES[“file”][“size”] > $maxSize)
{

echo “Error: File size exceeds the limit.”;

}
else
{

// Move the uploaded file to the target directory

if (move_uploaded_file($_FILES[“file”][“tmp_name”], $targetFile))
{

249
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

echo “The file has been uploaded successfully.”;

}
else
{
echo “Sorry, there was an error uploading your file.”;
}
}
}
else
{
echo “Error: “ . $_FILES[“file”][“error”];

250

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 6: File download

• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<?php

$file_path = ‘path/to/your/file.pdf’; // Replace with the actual file path

$file_name = ‘downloaded_file.pdf’; // Optional: Customize the filename for download

header(‘Content-Type: application/pdf’); // Set content type based on file extension

header(‘Content-Disposition: attachment; filename=”’ . $file_name . ‘”’); // Force download
header(‘Content-Length: ‘ . filesize($file_path)); // Set file size for better download management
readfile($file_path); // Read and output the file contents directly
// Alternatively, you can use:
// echo file_get_contents($file_path);

exit(); // Prevent further output

?>
• Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
• Run the Apache services from windows services
• Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
• Click the php file to run and verify the output

251
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 7: Common math functions

Basic Arithmetic Functions:
abs($number): Returns the absolute (positive) value of a number.
round($number, $precision = 0): Rounds a number to a specified number of decimal places.
ceil($number): Rounds a number up to the nearest integer.
floor($number): Rounds a number down to the nearest integer.
min($number1, $number2, ...): Returns the smallest value from a list of numbers.
max($number1, $number2, ...): Returns the largest value from a list of numbers.
pow($base, $exponent): Returns the base raised to the power of the exponent.
sqrt($number): Returns the square root of a number.
Trigonometric Functions:
sin($angle): Returns the sine of an angle in radians. cos($angle):
Returns the cosine of an angle in radians. tan($angle): Returns
the tangent of an angle in radians. asin($number): Returns the
arcsine of a number (in radians). acos($number): Returns the
arccosine of a number (in radians). atan($number): Returns the
arctangent of a number (in radians).
Logarithmic Functions:
log($number, $base = M_E): Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base (default is natural
logarithm, base e).
exp($number): Returns the value of e raised to the power of a number.
Number Base Conversion Functions:
base_convert($number, $frombase, $tobase): Converts a number between arbitrary bases.
bindec($binary_string): Converts a binary string to a decimal number.

252

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

decbin($number): Converts a decimal number to a binary string.

dechex($number): Converts a decimal number to a hexadecimal string.
hexdec($hex_string): Converts a hexadecimal string to a decimal number.
Other Mathematical Functions:
pi(): Returns the value of pi.
deg2rad($number): Converts degrees to radians.
rad2deg($number): Converts radians to degrees.
fmod($x, $y): Returns the floating-point remainder of x divided by y.

TASK 8: Display random numbers

• Open the text editor
• Write the following codes
<?php
echo rand().”<br/>”;//returns a pseudo-random integer between 0 and getrandmax().
echo rand(5, 15). “<br/>”;//returns random number between 5 and 15 (inclusive)
var_dump(random_int(100, 999));
echo “<br/>”;
var_dump(random_int(-1000, 0));// Get a cryptographically secure, uniformly selected
integer function for situations requiring strong randomness.
echo “<br/>”;
$bytes = random_bytes(5);
var_dump(bin2hex($bytes));// Get cryptographically secure random bytes
?>
• Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
• Run the Apache services from windows services
• Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
• Click the php file to run and verify the output

253
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Provide a code example demonstrating the use of the echo and print statements to display text on a web
page.
2 Provide a code example demonstrating how to capture the output of a PHP script and store it in a
variable for further processing.
3 Provide examples of how to retrieve user input from fields such as text fields, checkboxes, radio buttons,
and select dropdowns.
4 Provide a code example demonstrating how to access form data submitted via the GET method.
5 Provide a code example illustrating how to create a form that allows users to upload a file to the server.
6 Provide a simple code example demonstrating how to force the download of a file named “example.txt”.
7 Provide a code snippet illustrating how to set headers for downloading a PDF file named “document.pdf”.
8 Write a PHP function that takes a floating-point number as input and returns its absolute value.
9 Write a PHP code to calculate the sine, cosine, and tangent of an angle in radians.
10 Write a PHP code snippet to generate a random integer between 1 and 100 and display it on the screen.

254

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 53

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 54 : Demonstrate on E-mail in PHP, anatomy

of a cookie, setting a cookie with PHP,
deleting a cookie, creating session
cookie, working with the query string,
creating query string, starting a session,
Working with session, variables,
Destroying session, passing session
IDs, Encoding and decoding session
Objectives variables
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• set and delete cookie using PHP
• create and destroy a session using PHP
• work with a query string using PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Knowing anatomy of a cookie
Cookie Name: Choose a descriptive name that identifies the data stored. Cookie
Value: The data you want to store, like user preferences or a session ID.
Lifetime: How long the cookie should last (in seconds, hours, or days).
Path: The URL path where the cookie should be accessible. Default is current path.
Domain: The domain for which the cookie applies. Default is current domain.
Security: Whether the cookie should only be sent over secure HTTPS connections.
HttpOnly: Whether the cookie should be accessible only through HTTP, protecting it from JavaScript
access.

TASK 2: setting a cookie with PHP

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
$cookie_name = “username”;
$cookie_value = “ John Carter”;
$expire = time()+30*24*60*60; // 30 days in seconds
$path = “/”; // accessible on entire website
$domain = “”; // default domain
$secure = true; // only send over HTTPS
$httponly = true; // not accessible through JavaScript setcookie($cookie_name,
$cookie_value, $expire, $path, $domain, $secure,
$httponly);

255
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

echo “Cookie set successfully!”;

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 3: Deleting a cookie

I Deleting with unset()
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
if (isset($_COOKIE[“username”]))
{
unset($_COOKIE[“username “]);
echo “Cookie removed from script execution!”;
}
else
{
echo “Cookie not found.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/

256
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Deleting with setcookie()

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
if (isset($_COOKIE[“username”]))
{
setcookie($cookie_name, “”, time() - 3600, “/”); // Set expiration to past time
echo “Cookie removed from script execution!”;
}
else
{
echo “Cookie not found.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

257
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4: Starting a session

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Start the session
session_start();
echo”Session started with this id : “. session_id();
// Now you can set session variables
$_SESSION[‘username’] = ‘example_user’;
$_SESSION[‘is_logged_in’] = true;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 5: Working with session variables

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Start the session
session_start();
// Set session variables
$_SESSION[‘username’] = ‘john_doe’;
$_SESSION[‘user_email’] = ‘[email protected]’;
// Access session variables

258
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$username = $_SESSION[‘username’];
$user_email = $_SESSION[‘user_email’];
// Display session variables
echo “Username: $username <br>”;
echo “Email: $user_email <br>”;
// Modify session variable
$_SESSION[‘user_email’] = ‘[email protected]’;
// Display modified session variable
echo “Modified Email: “ . $_SESSION[‘user_email’] . “<br>”;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 6: Passing session ID

I Pass Session ID using URLs
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
session_start();
$sessionId = session_id();
echo “Session ID: $sessionId<br/>”;
echo “<a href=’next_page.php?PHPSESSID=$sessionId’>Next Page</a>”;
?>

259
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run the program
7 Click the “Next Page” link to pass ‘Session ID’ in the next page.

II Pass Session ID in Forms

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
session_start();
$sessionId = session_id();
echo “<form action=’process_form.php’ method=’post’>”;
echo “<input type=’hidden’ name=’PHPSESSID’ value=’$sessionId’>”;
echo “<input type=’text’ name=’username’ placeholder=’Enter your username’>”;
echo “<input type=’submit’ value=’Submit’>”;
echo “</form>”;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run the program
7 Click the “Submit” button to pass ‘Session ID’ in the next page.

260
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

III Retrieve Session ID on the Next Page

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
session_start();
if (isset($_GET[‘PHPSESSID’]))
{
// If passed in the URL
$sessionId = $_GET[‘PHPSESSID’];
}
elseif (isset($_POST[‘PHPSESSID’]))
{
// If passed in a form
$sessionId = $_POST[‘PHPSESSID’];
echo $sessionId .“This session ID retrieved”;
}
else
{
// If not explicitly passed, the session ID is already handled by PHP
$sessionId = session_id();
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

261
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 7: Setting a cookie

I Creating a session cookie
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
session_start();
// Set the session variable
$sessionId = session_id();
echo “session started with id :”.$sessionId
$_SESSION[‘username’] = ‘JohnDoe’;
// Set a cookie with the session ID
setcookie(session_name(), session_id(), time() + 60 * 60); // Expires in 1 hour
echo “Cookie set successfully!”;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Access session data on other pages

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
session_start();
if (isset($_SESSION[‘username’]))
{

262
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$username = $_SESSION[‘username’];
echo “Welcome back, $username!”;
}
else
{
echo “Session not found!”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 8: Encoding and decoding session variables

I Encoding session variables
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Start the session
session_start();
$username = ‘JohnDoe’;
//encode using base64_encode()
$encodedUsername = base64_encode($username);
$_SESSION[‘encoded_username’] = $encodedUsername;?>
</body>
</html>
3. Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4. Run the Apache services from windows services
5. Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6. Click the php file to run and verify the output

263
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

II Decoding session variables

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Start the session
session_start();

if (isset($_SESSION[‘encoded_username’]))
{
$encodedUsername = $_SESSION[‘encoded_username’];
//decode using base64_decode()
$decodedUsername = base64_decode($encodedUsername);
echo “Decoded Username: $decodedUsername”;
}
else
{
echo “Session variable ‘encoded_username’ not set.”;
}?>
</body>
</html>
3. Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4. Run the Apache services from windows services
5. Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 9: Destroying a session

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes

264
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<html>
<body>
<?php
// Start the session
session_start();
// Unset a session variable
unset($_SESSION[‘username’]);
unset($_SESSION[‘user_email’]);
// Destroy all session data
session_destroy();
echo “All session data successfully removed”;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 10: Working with the query string

I Creating a query string
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
$data = array(
‘name’ => ‘John Doe’,
‘age’ => 30
);
$query_string = http_build_query($data);

265
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$url = “http://localhost:8012/csa/querystring2.php?”.$query_string; header(“Location: $url”);//

Redirect with query string
exit(); // Stop further script execution

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as querystring1.php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output
II Processing query string
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
echo “Processing query string...<br/> “;
// Check if query string parameters exist
if(isset($_GET[‘name’]) && isset($_GET[‘age’]))
{
// Retrieve and sanitize the parameters
$name = htmlspecialchars($_GET[‘name’]);
$age = intval($_GET[‘age’]); // Convert age to integer
// Process the parameters
if($age >= 18)
{
echo “$name is an adult.”;
}
else
{
echo “$name is a minor.”;
}
}
else
{
// If parameters are not provided, display an error message
echo “Please provide name and age parameters.”;
}

266
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as querystring2.php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 11: Sending E-mail using PHP

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes

Note: This code needs a functioning mail server configured in the PHP environment to send emails.

<html>
<body>
<?php
$to = “[email protected]”;//provide the actual email address
$subject = “My Email Subject”;
$message = “This is the email body.”;

// Optional headers
$headers = “From: [email protected]” . “\r\n” .
“Reply-To: [email protected]”;

// Send the email

if (mail($to, $subject, $message, $headers))
{
echo “Email sent successfully!”;
}
else
{
echo “Error sending email.”;
}

267
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output
1 Provide a code example demonstrating how to set a cookie with the value that expires in 24 hours.
2 Provide a code example demonstrating how to retrieve the value of a cookie named “username” set in
a previous request.
3 Provide a code example demonstrating how to delete a cookie named “username” that was previously
set.
4 Provide a code example demonstrating how to start a session and set a session variable
named “myname” with the value “CSATRAINEE”.
5 Provide a code example demonstrating how to modify the value of the session variable “username”
set in a previous request.
6 Provide a code example demonstrating how to unset the session variable “username”.
7 Write a PHP code snippet generating a unique session ID, associating it with a session, and storing it
in a cookie
8 Provide examples of how to add query string parameters programmatically, either within the same
page or when redirecting to another page.

268
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 54
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 55 : Demonstrateon Creating and deleting a

file, Reading and writing text files, working
with directories in PHP, checking for
existence of file, determining file size,
opening a file for writing, reading, or
appending, Writing Data to the file
Reading characters
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create and delete files/folders in server using PHP
• read and write text files using PHP
• determine file size and checking for existence of file using PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Working with directories
I Creating a Directory
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php

$directory_path = ‘example_directory’;
// Check if the directory doesn’t exist before attempting to create
if (!is_dir($directory_path))
{
// Create the directory with mkdir()
mkdir($directory_path);
echo “Directory created successfully: $directory_path”;
}
else
{
echo “Directory already exists: $directory_path”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/

269
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Listing Files and Directories in a Directory

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
$directory_path = ‘example_directory’;
// Check if the directory exists before listing its contents
if (is_dir($directory_path))
{
// Open the directory
$directory_handle = opendir($directory_path);
// Read and display the contents
echo “Contents of $directory_path:\n”;
while (($file = readdir($directory_handle)) !== false)
{
echo $file . “\n”;
}
// Close the directory handle

270
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

closedir($directory_handle);
}
else
{

echo “Directory not found: $directory_path”;

}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

III Deleting a Directory and Its Contents

1 Open the text editor

271
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Write the following codes

<html>
<body>
<?php
$directory_path = ‘example_directory’;
// Check if the directory exists before attempting to delete if
(is_dir($directory_path))
{
// Open the directory
$directory_handle = opendir($directory_path);
// Iterate over the contents and delete files and subdirectories
while (($file = readdir($directory_handle)) !== false)
{
if ($file != “.” && $file != “..”)
{
// Delete files and subdirectories
unlink($directory_path . ‘/’ . $file);
}
}
// Close the directory handle
closedir($directory_handle);
// Delete the directory itself
rmdir($directory_path);
echo “Directory and its contents deleted successfully: $directory_path”;
}
else
{
echo “Directory not found: $directory_path”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

272
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2: Creating a file

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Specify the file name and path:
$filename = “my_new_file.txt”; // Modify with desired name and location
// Open the file in write mode (creates the file if it doesn’t exist):
$handle = fopen($filename, “w”) or die(“Unable to open file!”);
// Write content to the file:
$content = “This is the content of my new file!”; fwrite($handle,
$content);
// Close the file:
fclose($handle);
// Optional: Display a success message:
echo “File created successfully!”;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

273
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Checking for existence of file

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Specify the file name
$fileName = ‘my_new_file.txt’;
// Check if the file exists if
(file_exists($fileName))
{
// File exists, display a success message
echo “File ‘$fileName’ exists.”;
}
else
{
</?/ pFh ipl e does not exist, display an error message
echo “Error: File ‘$fileName’ does not exist.”;
}
?>

</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 4 : Determining file size

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>

274
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Specify the file name

$fileName = ‘my_new_file.txt’;

// Check if the file exists

if (file_exists($fileName))
{
// Get the file size in bytes
$fileSizeBytes = filesize($fileName);
// Convert the file size to kilobytes or megabytes
$fileSizeKB = $fileSizeBytes / 1024; // Bytes to Kilobytes
$fileSizeMB = $fileSizeKB / 1024; // Kilobytes to Megabytes
// Display the file size
echo “File ‘$fileName’ has a size of $fileSizeBytes bytes,
$fileSizeKB KB, or $fileSizeMB MB.”;
}
else
{
// Display an error message if the file does not exist
echo “Error: File ‘$fileName’ does not exist.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 5: Opening a File for reading

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php

275
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// File path
$filePath = ‘my_new_file.txt’;

// Open the file in read mode

$fileHandle = fopen($filePath, ‘r’);

// Check if file opened successfully

if ($fileHandle) {
// File opened successfully, perform operations here
echo “File opened successfully.”;
// Close the file handle
fclose($fileHandle);
} else {
// File opening failed, handle error
echo “Failed to open file.”;
}
?>

</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 6: Opening a File for writing text content

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php

276
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Specify the file name

$fileName = ‘example.txt’;
// Open the file in write mode (‘w’)
$fileHandle = fopen($fileName, ‘w’);

// Check if the file is opened successfully

if ($fileHandle)
{
// Write content to the file
fwrite($fileHandle, ‘This is a line of text.’);

// Close the file handle

fclose($fileHandle);

echo “File ‘$fileName’ has been written successfully.”;

}
else
{

// Display an error message if the file cannot be opened

echo “Error: Unable to open the file for writing.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 7: Opening a File for appending content

1 Open the text editor

277
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Write the following codes

<html>
<body>
<?php
// Specify the file name
$fileName = ‘example.txt’;
// Open the file in append mode (‘a’), create the file if it doesn’t exist
$fileHandle = fopen($fileName, ‘a’);
// Check if the file is opened successfully if
($fileHandle)
{
// Append content to the file
fwrite($fileHandle, ‘This is a line of text appended to the file.’);
// Close the file handle
fclose($fileHandle);
echo “File ‘$fileName’ has been appended successfully.”;
}
else
{
echo “Error: Unable to open or create the file for appending.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 8: Writing Data to the file

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>

278
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<?php

$file=”info.txt”;
$content=”hai you are welcome”; file_put_contents($file,
$content) or die(“Error not opening”);
echo “Content written in the file”;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 9: Reading characters

I Reading characters using file_get_contents function
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
$file=’my_new_file.txt’;
if(file_exists($file))
{
$content=file_get_contents($file) or die(“Error file opening not possible “);
echo $content;
}
else
{
echo “ERROR: File does not exist.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>

279
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Reading characters using file function

1 Open the text editor
2. Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
$file=”example.txt”;
if(file_exists($file))
{
$content=file($file) or die(“Error file opening not possible “);
foreach( $content as $line)
{
echo $line;
}
}
else
{
echo “ERROR: File does not exist.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

280
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 10: Deleting a File

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
// Specify the file name
$fileName = ‘example.txt’;
// Check if the file exists before attempting to delete if
(file_exists($fileName))
{
// Attempt to delete the file if
(unlink($fileName))
{
echo “File ‘$fileName’ has been deleted successfully.”;
}
else
{
echo “Error: Unable to delete the file.”;
}
}
else
{
echo “Error: File ‘$fileName’ does not exist.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

281
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Provide a code example demonstrating how to create a directory named “uploads” within the current
working directory.
2 Provide a code example demonstrating how to list the contents of a directory named “images”.
3 Provide a code example demonstrating how to delete a directory named “temp” and its contents.
4 Provide a code example demonstrating how to open a file named “example.txt” in read mode.
5 Provide a code example demonstrating how to read each line from a file handle using the fgets() function.
6 Provide a code example demonstrating how to use the file_get_contents()
7 Provide a code example demonstrating how to use the fwrite() function to write a string to a file handle.
8 Provide a code example demonstrating how to open a file in append mode (“a”) and write text content to it.
9. Provide a code example demonstrating how to delete a file named “example.txt” from the filesystem.

282
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 55
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 56 : Work With Forms - Super global variables

the server array A script to acquire user
input, importing user input Accessing
user input, Combine HTML and PHP code.,
using hidden fields
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to:
• acquire user input from a HTML form using PHP
• combine HTML and PHP code in single file
• create hidden feilds and access it using PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• apache web server • web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Super global variables the server array
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title>$_SERVER Super Global</title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>Server Information</h2>
<ul>
<li>Server Name: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘SERVER_NAME’]; ?></li>
<li>Server Software: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘SERVER_SOFTWARE’]; ?></li>
<li>Server Protocol: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘SERVER_PROTOCOL’]; ?></li>
<li>Request Method: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘REQUEST_METHOD’]; ?></li>
<li>Request Time: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘REQUEST_TIME’]; ?></li>
<li>Request URI: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘REQUEST_URI’]; ?></li>
<li>Query String: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘QUERY_STRING’]; ?></li>
<li>User Agent: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘HTTP_USER_AGENT’]; ?></li>
<li>Remote Address: <?php echo $_SERVER[‘REMOTE_ADDR’]; ?></li>
</ul>

283
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 2: Acquiring user input using an HTML

form I Create an HTML Form
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<form action=”process_form.php” method=”POST”>
Name: <input type=”text” name=”name”><br>
Email: <input type=”email” name=”email”><br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Submit”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .html extension
II Create a PHP script that acquires user input
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php

284

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

if ($_SERVER[‘REQUEST_METHOD’] == ‘POST’)
{
// Access form data using $_POST array
$name = $_POST[‘name’];
$email = $_POST[‘email’];
// Display a confirmation message
echo “Thank you, “ . $name . “ for your submission!”;
}

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the .html file to run and verify the output

285

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Importing user input and accessing user input I

Create an HTML Form
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes

<html
<head>
<title>PHP User Input</title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>Enter your name:</h2>
<form action=”process.php” method=”get”>
<input type=”text” name=”name” placeholder=”Enter your name”>
<button type=”submit”>Submit</button>
</form>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as index.html

II Create a PHP script that acquires user input

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>
<body>
<?php
if ($_SERVER[“REQUEST_METHOD”] == “GET”)
{
// Check if the name field is set and not empty
if (isset($_GET[“name”]) && !empty($_GET[“name”]))
{
$name = $_GET[“name”];
// Display a greeting message echo
“Hello, $name! Welcome!”;
}
else
{
// If name field is empty, display an error message
echo “Please enter your name!”;
}

286

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

}
else
{
// If the request method is not POST, redirect back to the form
header(“Location: index.html”);
exit();
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the index.html file to run and verify the output

287

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4: Combine HTML and PHP code

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title Combine HTML and PHP code </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Check if the form is submitted
if ($_SERVER[“REQUEST_METHOD”] == “POST”)
{
// Check if the name field is set and not empty
if (isset($_POST[“name”]) && !empty($_POST[“name”]))
{
$name = $_POST[“name”];
// Display a greeting message
echo “<h2>Hello, $name! Welcome!</h2>”;
}
else
{

// If name field is empty, display an error message

echo “<h2>Please enter your name!</h2>”;
}
}
?>
<form action=”<?php echo htmlspecialchars($_SERVER[“PHP_SELF”]); ?>”
method=”post”>
<input type=”text” name=”name” placeholder=”Enter your name”>
<button type=”submit”>Submit</button>
</form>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

288

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 5 : Using hidden fields

I Creating Hidden Fields
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes

<html>
<body>
<form method=”post” action=”process.php”>
<input type=”hidden” name=”user_id” value=”123”>
<input type=”text” name=”username”>
<button type=”submit”>Submit</button>
</form>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .html extension

II Accessing Hidden Field Values
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html>

289

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<body>
<?php
if ($_SERVER[‘REQUEST_METHOD’] == ‘POST’)
{
$userId = $_POST[‘user_id’];
$username = $_POST[‘username’];
// Process the values
echo “User ID: $userId, Username: $username”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the .html file to run and verify the output

1 Provide a code example to determine the request method (GET, POST, etc.) used by a client in PHP.
2 Provide examples of accessing common request headers in PHP such as
$_SERVER[‘HTTP_USER_AGENT’] and $_SERVER[‘HTTP_REFERER’].
3 Provide a code example demonstrating how to create a simple HTML form with a text input field and retrieve
the user’s input using the $_GET superglobal.
4 Provide a code example of a PHP file that contains an HTML form for acquiring user input.
5 Provide a code example of setting hidden field values in one page and retrieving them in another page using
the $_POST or $_GET superglobals.

290

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 56

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 57 : Demonstrate redirecting the user, File

upload and scripts
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• redireet user to one page to other using PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Redirecting a
user I Using header()
function
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title >Using header() function </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Redirect to another page after 5 seconds
header(“Location:destination-page.php”);
exit; // Make sure to exit after sending the header
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

291
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

II Adding a delay before redirection

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title >Adding a delay before redirection </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
sleep(5);
header(“Location:destination-page.php”);
exit;
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

292

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 57

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Provide a code example of how to redirect a user to another URL with a delay of 5 seconds

293

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 57

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 58 : Demonstrate Regular Expressions - The

basic regular expressions, PCRE,
Matching patterns, Finding matches,
Replace patterns, Modifiers, Breakup
Strings
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to:
• use the basic regular expressions in PHP
• use PCRE function in PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Working with basic regular
expressions I Matching a single character
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title > Matching a single character </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “Hello, world!”;
$pattern = “/w/”; // Matches any word character (alphanumeric or underscore)
if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “Match found!”; // Output: Match found!
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address

294
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Matching a literal string

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching a literal string </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “Hello, World!”;
$pattern = “/World/”;
if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{

echo “Pattern found in the string.”;

}
else
{

echo “Pattern not found in the string.”;

}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

295

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

III Matching any character from a set

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching any character from a set </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “The color is blue.”;
$pattern = “/[aeiou]/”; // Matches any vowel

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “The string contains a vowel.”;
}

?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

IV Matching any single character using the dot wildcard

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching any single character using the dot wildcard </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “cat”;

296

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$pattern = “/c.t/”;

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “Pattern found in the string.”;
}
else
{
echo “Pattern not found in the string.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

V Matching any digit using ‘\d’

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching any digit using ‘\d’ </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “abc123xyz”;
$pattern = “/\d/”;

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{

297

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

echo “Pattern found in the string.”;

}
else
{

echo “Pattern not found in the string.”;

}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

VI Matching repeating characters using {}

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching repeating characters using {} </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “12345”;
$pattern = “/\d{3,5}/”; // Matches 3 to 5 digits

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “The string contains 3 to 5 digits.”;
}
?>

</body>
</html>

298

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

VII Matching specific number of occurrences using {}

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching specific number of occurrences using {} </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “hellooooo”;
$pattern = “/o{5}/”;

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “Pattern found in the string.”;
}
else
{
echo “Pattern not found in the string.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

299

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

VIII Matching one or more occurrences using +

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching one or more occurrences using + </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “aaabbbccc”;
$pattern = “/a+/”;

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “Pattern found in the string.”;
}
else
{
echo “Pattern not found in the string.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

300

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

IX Matching zero or more occurrences using *

1. Open the text editor

2. Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching zero or more occurrences using * </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “abbbbbbbc”;
$pattern = “/ab*c/”;

if (preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “Pattern found in the string.”;
}
else
{
echo “Pattern not found in the string.”;
}
?>

</body>
</html>

3. Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4. Run the Apache services from windows services
5. Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6. Click the php file to run and verify the output

301

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

X Matching word boundaries

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Matching word boundaries </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.”;
$pattern = “/\bfox\b/”; // Matches “fox” as a whole word if
(preg_match($pattern, $string))
{
echo “The word ‘fox’ is present as a whole word.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 2 : Using modifiers

I i (case-insensitive) modifier
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> i (case-insensitive) modifier </title>
</head>
<body>

302

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<?php
$string = “Hello World”;
if (preg_match(“/hello/i”, $string))
{ echo “Match found!”;
} else {
echo “No match found!”;
}
// Output: Match found!
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II m (multiline mode) modifier

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> m (multiline mode) modifier </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “First line\nSecond line”;
if (preg_match(“/^Second/m”, $string)) {
echo “Match found!- multiline mode “;
} else
{
echo “No match found!”;

}
// Output: Match found!
?>

303

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

III s (single line mode) modifier

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> s (single line mode) modifier </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “First line\nSecond line”;
if (preg_match(“/First.*line/s”, $string)) {
echo “Match found!- single line mode “;
} else
{
echo “No match found!”;

}
// Output: Match found!
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

304

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

IV x (extended) modifier
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> x (extended) modifier </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$pattern = “
/
^ # Start of the string
\d{3} # Match exactly 3 digits
- # Match a hyphen
\d{4} # Match exactly 4 digits
$ # End of the string
/x
“;

$string = “123-4567”;
if (preg_match($pattern, $string)) {
echo “Match found!- extended modifier”;
“;
} else {
echo “No match found!”;
}
// Output: Match found!
?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

305

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3 : Using PCRE Functions

I Using preg_match() for Simple Matching
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Using preg_match() </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$string = “My phone number is 123-456-7890.”;
$pattern = “/\b\d{3}-\d{3}-\d{4}\b/”;
if (preg_match($pattern, $string, $matches))
{
echo “Phone number found: “ . $matches[0]; // Output: 123-456-7890
}
else
{
echo “No phone number found.”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

306

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

II Using preg_match_all() for Multiple Matches

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Using preg_match_all()</title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$str = “The rain in SPAIN falls mainly on the plains.”;
$pattern = “/ain/i”;
echo preg_match_all($pattern, $str);
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

III Using preg_replace() for Replacement

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Using preg_replace() </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$str = “Visit Microseft!”;
$pattern = “/microsoft/i”;
echo preg_replace($pattern, “Google”, $str);

307

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

IV Using preg_split() for splits a string into substrings

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Using preg_split()</title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// String to split
$string = “Hello, World! This is a test string.”;
// Split the string by spaces or punctuation marks
$words = preg_split(“/[\s,]+/”, $string);
// Display the resulting array
print_r($words);
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

308

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

V Using preg_grep() for filtering elements of an array

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Using preg_grep() </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Sample array containing strings
$array = array(
‘apple’,
‘banana’,
‘orange’,
‘grape’,
‘watermelon’,
‘kiwi’,
‘strawberry’
);
// Regular expression pattern to match fruits containing ‘a’ followed by any character
$pattern = ‘/a./’;
// Use preg_grep() to filter array elements based on the pattern
$filteredArray = preg_grep($pattern, $array);
// Output the filtered array
echo “Filtered Array:\n”;
print_r($filteredArray);
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

VI. Using preg_quote() for escapes special characters in a string

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes

309

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<html >
<head>
<title> Using preg_quote() </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// String containing characters to be quoted
$string = “Escaping: .\+*?[^]{}()$=!|:-”;
// Quote the string to escape regular expression characters
$quotedString = preg_quote($string);
// Regular expression pattern containing the quoted string
$pattern = ‘/^’ . $quotedString . ‘$/’;
// Test string to match against the pattern
$testString = “Escaping: .\\+*?[^]{}()$=!|:-”;
// Perform regular expression matching if
(preg_match($pattern, $testString)) {
echo “String matches the pattern.\n”;
} else {

echo “String does not match the pattern.\n”;

}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output
1 Provide an example of using a regular expression to match a single character in PHP
2 Provide an example of a regular expression pattern in PHP that matches any digits 0 to 9?
3 Provide an example of exclude specific characters from a set when using a regular expression in PHP?
4 Provide an example of a regular expression in PHP that matches exactly three occurrences of a specific
pattern?
5 provide an example of a regular expression in PHP that matches a word boundary at the beginning of a word?
6 Give an example of a situation where using the (case-insensitive) modifier in PHP regular expressions?
7 Provide an example of a complex regular expression pattern where using the (extended) modifier in PHP
would enhance readability.
8 Provide an example of the (extended) modifier changes the behavior of whitespace and comments within a
regular expression pattern.
9 Provide an example of how to use preg_match_all() in PHP to extract multiple occurrences of a pattern from
a string?
10 Provide an example of preg_split() handle capturing groups within the regular expression pattern when
splitting a string in PHP
11 Give a sample PHP code of using regular expressions for email validation?

310

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 58

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 59 : Demonstrate working with Classes

And Objects - Creating an object, Object
properties, Object methods, Object
constructors and destructors
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create object in PHP
• use object properties in PHP
• use object constructors and destructors in PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Creating an object, properties and methods
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Creating an object </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
class Person
{
//Add Properties
public $name;
public $age;
//Add Methods
public function greet()
{
echo “Hello, my name is “ . $this->name . “.”;
}
}
//Create an Object Instance

311
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$person1 = new Person();

//Access and Set Properties
$person1->name = “Bob”;
$person1->age = 25;
//Call Methods
$person1->greet(); // Output: Hello, my name is Bob.
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output.

TASK 2: Object constructors

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> constructors</title>
</head>
<body>
<?php

class MyClass
{
// Properties
public $name;
public $age;
// Constructor
public function construct($name, $age)
{

312
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 59
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$this->name = $name;
$this->age = $age;
echo “Constructor called\n”;
}
// Method to display information
public function displayInfo()
{
echo “Name: “ . $this->name . “, Age: “ . $this->age . “\n”;
}
}

// Creating an object of MyClass

$obj = new MyClass(“John”, 30);

// Calling method to display information

$obj->displayInfo();

?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 3: Object destructors

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> destructors</title>
</head>

313
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 59
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<body>
<?php
class MyClass
{
// Destructor
public function destruct()
{
echo “Destructor called\n”;
}
}

// Creating an object of MyClass

$obj = new MyClass();

// The object will be destroyed at the end of the script

?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output.

1 Create an object of a class named Car in PHP, which has properties such as $make, $model, and $year.
Assign values to these properties during object instantiation.
2 Create a PHP class called Book with properties $title, $author, and $price. Write a constructor method to
initialize these properties. Instantiate an object of the Book class with the title “PHP Programming”, author
“John Doe”, and price $29.99.
3 Create a PHP class Employee with private properties $name and $salary. Implement getter and setter methods
for these properties. Instantiate an Employee object and set the name to “John” and salary to 50000.

314
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 59
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 60 : Perform class constants, Class

inheritance, Abstract classes and
methods, Object serialization, checking
for class and method, existence,
Objectives Exceptions, Iterators
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use inheritance and abstract classes in PHP
• use object serialization in PHP
• use exceptions and lterators in PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• Computer/Laptop with latest configuration • PHP
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • Text editor
• Apache web server • Web browser

Procedure
TASK 1: Using class constants
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> class constants </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
class MathConstants
{
const PI = 3.14159;
const E = 2.71828;
public function printConstants()
{
echo “The value of PI is: “ . self::PI . “<br/>”;
echo “The value of E is: “ . self::E . “<br/>”;
}
}
class Circle
{

315
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

private $radius;
public function construct($radius)
{
$this->radius = $radius;
}
public function getArea()
{
return MathConstants::PI * $this->radius * $this->radius;
}
}
$con= new MathConstants();
$con->printConstants()
$circle = new Circle(5);
echo “Area of circle is:”. $circle->getArea(); // Output: 78.53975
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 2: Using class inheritance

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Class inheritance </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php

316
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Parent class
class Animal
{
protected $name;
public function construct($name)
{
$this->name = $name;
}
public function speak()
{
echo $this->name . “ makes a sound.\n”;
}
}
// Child class inheriting from
Animal class Dog extends Animal
{
public function bark()
{
echo $this->name . “ barks.\n”;
}
}
// Child class inheriting from Animal
class Cat extends Animal
{
public function meow()
{
echo $this->name . “ meows.\n”;
}
}
// Creating instances of child classes
$dog = new Dog(“Buddy”);
$cat = new Cat(“Whiskers”);
// Calling methods from parent and child classes
$dog->speak(); // Output: Buddy makes a sound.
$dog->bark(); // Output: Buddy barks.
$cat->speak(); // Output: Whiskers makes a sound.
$cat->meow(); // Output: Whiskers meows.
?>
</body>

317
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 3: Using abstract classes and methods

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Abstract classes and methods </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Abstract class
abstract class Shape
{
protected $name;
public function construct($name)
{
$this->name = $name;
}
// Abstract method - no implementation
abstract public function calculateArea();
}
// Concrete subclass of Shape
class Circle extends Shape
{
private $radius;
public function construct($name, $radius)

318
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

{
parent:: construct($name);
$this->radius = $radius;
}
// Implementing abstract method
public function calculateArea()
{
return pi() * pow($this->radius, 2);
}
}
// Concrete subclass of Shape
class Square extends Shape
{
private $side;
public function construct($name, $side)
{
parent:: construct($name);
$this->side = $side;
}
// Implementing abstract method
public function calculateArea()
{
return pow($this->side, 2);
}
}
// Creating instances of concrete subclasses
$circle = new Circle(“Circle”, 5);
$square = new Square(“Square”, 4);
// Calling methods on instances
echo”Area of circle is :”.$circle->calculateArea(); // Output: 78.539816339745
echo “<br/>”;
echo”Area of square is :”.$square->calculateArea(); // Output: 16
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

319
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4: Checking for class and method existence

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Checking for class and method existence </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Define a class
class MyClass
{
public function myMethod()
{
echo “Hello from myMethod!<br/>”;
}
}
// Check if class exists
if (class_exists(‘MyClass’))
{
echo “MyClass exists. <br/>”;
}
else
{
echo “MyClass does not exist. <br/>”;
}
// Check if method exists in the class
if (method_exists(‘MyClass’, ‘myMethod’))
{
echo “myMethod exists in MyClass. <br/>”;
}
else

320
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

{
echo “myMethod does not exist in MyClass. <br/>”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 5: Object serialization

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Object serialization </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Define a class
class MyClass
{
public $name;
public $age;
public function construct($name, $age)
{
$this->name = $name;
$this->age = $age;
}
}
// Create an object of MyClass
$obj = new MyClass(“John”, 30);

321
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Serialize the object

$serializedObj = serialize($obj);

// Output the serialized object

echo “Serialized object: $serializedObj<br/>”;
// Unserialize the object
$unserializedObj = unserialize($serializedObj);
// Output the unserialized object
echo “Unserialized object:\n”;
var_dump($unserializedObj);
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 6: Using Exceptions

I Using try, catch, and throw keywords
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Exceptions </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
function divide($dividend, $divisor)
{
if ($divisor === 0)
{
throw new MyCustomException(“Cannot divide by zero!”);

322
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

}
return $dividend / $divisor;
}
class MyCustomException extends Exception
{
public function construct($message, $code = 0)
{
parent:: construct($message, $code);
}
}
try
{
$result = divide(10, 2);
echo “Result: $result<br/>”;
$result = divide(10, 0); // This will throw an exception
}
catch (MyCustomException $e)
{
echo “Error: “ . $e->getMessage();
}
catch (Exception $e)
{
echo “General error: “ . $e->getMessage();
}
finally
{
echo “<br/>Always executed code”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>

3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension

4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

323
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

II Using a custom exception class

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> custom exception </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Define a custom exception class
class CustomException extends Exception
{
public function errorMessage()
{
// Custom error message
$errorMsg = ‘Error on line ‘ . $this->getLine() . ‘ in ‘
. $this->getFile() . ‘<br/> <b>’ . $this->getMessage() .
‘</b>’;
return $errorMsg;
}
}
// Function to validate an email address
function validateEmail($email)
{
// Check if the email is valid
if (!filter_var($email, FILTER_VALIDATE_EMAIL))
{
// Throw a custom exception if the email is not valid
throw new CustomException($email);
}
// Return true if the email is valid
return true;
}
// Test the validateEmail function with some email addresses
try

324
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

{
validateEmail(“[email protected]”);
echo “Valid email address.<br/>”;
validateEmail(“invalid_email_address”);
echo “This line will not be reached due an exception will be thrown.<br/>”;
}
catch (CustomException $e)
{
// Catch the custom exception and handle it
echo $e->errorMessage() . “<br/>”;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 7: Using
Iterators I Using
foreach loop
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Iterators </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$numbers = [1, 2, 3, 4, 5];
foreach ($numbers as $number)
{
echo $number . “ “;
}

325
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Using ArrayIterator
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Iterators </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$numbers = [1, 2, 3, 4, 5];
$iterator = new ArrayIterator($numbers);
while ($iterator->valid())
{
echo $iterator->current() . “ “;
$iterator->next();
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

326
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

III Iterating over Objects

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> Iterators </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
class User
{
public $name;
public $age;

public function construct($name, $age)

{
$this->name = $name;
$this->age = $age;
}
}

$users = [
new User(“Alice”, 25),
new User(“Bob”, 30),
];
// Using foreach loop and custom IteratorAggregate:
class UserCollection implements IteratorAggregate
{
private $users;
public function construct(array $users)
{
$this->users = $users;
}
public function getIterator()

327

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

{
return new ArrayIterator($this->users);
}
}
$userCollection = new UserCollection($users);
foreach ($userCollection as $user)
{
echo $user->name . “ (“ . $user->age . “)” . PHP_EOL;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

1 Provide an example of a class constants be accessed from outside the class definition in PHP.
2 Create a ‘Person’ class with attributes like ‘name’ and ‘age’. Create a ‘Student’ subclass that inherits
from Person and adds a ‘studentID’ attribute. Instantiate a Student object and access its superclass
attributes along with the subclass attribute.
3 Create an abstract class ‘Animal’ with an abstract method ‘makeSound()’. Create concrete subclasses ‘Cat’
and ‘Dog’ that extend Animal and implement the makeSound() method to produce different sounds for
each animal. Call the makeSound() method for a Cat and a Dog object.
4 Create a class ‘Product’ with properties like ‘name’, ‘price’, and ‘quantity’. Serialize an object of this class
into a string using PHP’s serialization mechanism.
5 Create a function that reads data from a file, use PHP exceptions to handle errors such as file not found
or insufficient permissions while reading the file.
6 Create an array of product objects representing items in a shopping cart. Use the ArrayIterator class in
PHP to iterate over this array and calculate the total cost of all items in the shopping cart.

328
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 60
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 61 : Connect to MySQL database from PHP

and insert, delete & update data in MySQl database from
webpage
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create a MySQL database and table from PHP
• insert and update data in MySQL table from PHP
• delete data in MySQL table from PHP.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with latest configuration • web browser
• operating system: windows 10 or 11 • apache web server
• Text editor • PHP
• MySQL server

Procedure
TASK 1: Connect to MySQL database from PHP
I Connect to MySQL and create a databse
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> create a databse </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
$servername = “localhost”; // Change this if MySQL server is on a different host
$username = “your_username”; // Change this to your MySQL username
$password = “your_password”; // Change this to your MySQL password
// Create connection
$conn = new mysqli($servername, $username, $password);
// Check connection
if ($conn->connect_error)
{
die(“Connection failed: “ . $conn->connect_error);
}
// Create database
$sql = “CREATE DATABASE myDB”;

329
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

if ($conn->query($sql) === TRUE) {

echo “Database created successfully”;
} else {
echo “Error creating database: “ . $conn->error;
}
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

II Connect to MySQL and create a table

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes

330

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<html >
<head>
<title> create a table </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Database connection parameters
$servername = “localhost”; // Change this if MySQL server is on a different host
$username = “your_username”; // Change this to your MySQL username
$password = “your_password”; // Change this to your MySQL password
$database = “example_db”; // Change this to your database name
// Create connection
$conn = new mysqli($servername, $username, $password, $database);
// Check connection
if ($conn->connect_error) {
die(“Connection failed: “ . $conn->connect_error);
}
// sql to create table
$sql = “create table persons(
id int, first_name varchar(30), last_name varchar(30) , email varchar(70))”;
if ($conn->query($sql) === TRUE) {
echo “Table created successfully”;
} else {
echo “Error creating table: “ . $conn->error;
}
$conn->close();
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

331

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2 : Connect to MySQL database from PHP and insert data

1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Database connection parameters
$servername = “localhost”; // Change this if MySQL server is on a different host
$username = “your_username”; // Change this to your MySQL username
$password = “your_password”; // Change this to your MySQL password
$database = “example_db”; // Change this to your database name
// Create connection
$conn = new mysqli($servername, $username, $password, $database);
// Check connection
if ($conn->connect_error) {
die(“Connection failed: “ . $conn->connect_error);
}
$sql = “INSERT INTO persons (first_name, last_name, email) VALUES (‘Peter’, ‘Parker’, ‘peterparker@
mail.com’)”;
if ($conn->query($sql) === TRUE) {

332

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

echo “New record created successfully”;

} else {
echo “Error: “ . $sql . “<br>” . $conn->error;
}
$conn->close();
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder with .php extension
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the php file to run and verify the output

TASK 3: Connect to MySQL database from PHP and insert data using prepare statement
i Create an HTML form in the webpage (index.html) to collect the data from the user
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head> HTML form </title>
</head>
<body>

333

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<body>
<h2>Insert Data into MySQL Database</h2>
<form method=”post” action=”insert.php”>
<label for=”username”>Username:</label><br>
<input type=”text” id=”username” name=”username” required><br><br>
<label for=”email”>Email:</label><br>
<input type=”email” id=”email” name=”email” required><br><br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Submit”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as index.html
ii Create a PHP script (insert.php) to connect to the database and handle the insertion process.
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head>
<title> </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Database connection parameters
$servername = “localhost”; // Change this if the MySQL server is on a different host
$username = “your_username”; // Change this to MySQL username
$password = “your_password”; // Change this to MySQL password
$database = “example_db”; // Change this to database name
// Create connection
$conn = new mysqli($servername, $username, $password, $database);
// Check connection
if ($conn->connect_error)
{
die(“Connection failed: “ . $conn->connect_error);
}

// Check if the form is submitted

if ($_SERVER[“REQUEST_METHOD”] == “POST”)
{
// Get form data
username = $_POST[“username”];

334

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

$email = $_POST[“email”];
// Prepare and execute the SQL statement to insert data into the table
$stmt = $conn->prepare(“INSERT INTO users (username, email) VALUES (?,?)”);
$stmt->bind_param(“ss”, $username, $email);

if ($stmt->execute())
{
echo “New record inserted successfully”;
}
else
{
echo “Error: “ . $conn->error;
}

// Close statement
$stmt->close();
}

// Close connection
$conn->close();
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as insert.php
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the index.html file to run and verify the output

335

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4: Connect to MySQL database from PHP and update data

i Create an HTML form in the webpage (index.html) to collect the data from the user
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head> HTML form </title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>Update Data in MySQL Database</h2>
<form method=”post” action=”update.php”>
<label for=”username”>Username of Record to Update:</label><br>
<input type=”text” id=”username” name=”username” required><br><br>
<label for=”email”>New Email:</label><br>
<input type=”email” id=”email” name=”email” required><br><br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Update”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as index.html

336

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

ii Create a PHP script (update.php) to connect to the database and handle the update process based on
user input.
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head> HTML form </title>
</head>
<body>
<?php
// Database connection parameters
$servername = “localhost”; // Change this if MySQL server is on a different host
$username = “your_username”; // Change this to MySQL username
$password = “your_password”; // Change this to MySQL password
$database = “example_db”; // Change this to database name
// Create connection
$conn = new mysqli($servername, $username, $password, $database);
// Check connection
if ($conn->connect_error)
{
die(“Connection failed: “ . $conn->connect_error);
}
// Check if the form is submitted
if ($_SERVER[“REQUEST_METHOD”] == “POST”)
{
// Get form data
//$id = $_POST[“id”];
$newUsername = $_POST[“username”];
$newEmail = $_POST[“email”];
// Prepare and execute the SQL statement to update data in the table
$stmt = $conn->prepare(“UPDATE users SET email = ? WHERE username = ?”);
$stmt->bind_param(“ss”,$newEmail,$newUsername);
if ($stmt->execute())
{

echo “Record updated successfully”;

}
else
{

echo “Error: “ . $conn->error;

}

337

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Close statement
$stmt->close();
}

// Close connection
$conn->close();
?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as update.php
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the index.html file to run and verify the output

338

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 5: Connect to MySQL database from PHP and delete data

i Create an HTML form in the webpage (index.html) to collect the data from the user
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >
<head> HTML form </title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>Delete Data from MySQL Database</h2>
<form method=”post” action=”delete.php”>
<label for=”username”>Username of Record to Delete:</label><br>
<input type=”text” id=”username” name=”username” required><br><br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Delete”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as index.html
ii Create a PHP script (delete.php) to connect to the database and handle the update process based on
user input.
1 Open the text editor
2 Write the following codes
<html >

339

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

<head> HTML form </title>

</head>
<body>
<?php
// Database connection parameters
$servername = “localhost”; // Change this if MySQL server is on a different host
$username = “root”; // Change this to your MySQL username
$password = “”; // Change this to your MySQL password
$database = “mydb”; // Change this to your database name

// Create connection
$conn = new mysqli($servername, $username, $password, $database);
// Check connection
if ($conn->connect_error)
{
die(“Connection failed: “ . $conn->connect_error);
}
// Check if the form is submitted
if ($_SERVER[“REQUEST_METHOD”] == “POST”)
{
// Get ID from the form
$username = $_POST[“username”];
// Prepare and execute the SQL statement to delete data from the table
$stmt = $conn->prepare(“DELETE FROM users WHERE username = ?”);
$stmt->bind_param(“s”, $username);
if ($stmt->execute())
{
echo “Record deleted successfully”;
}
else
{
echo “Error: “ . $conn->error;
}

// Close statement
$stmt->close();
}
// Close connection
$conn->close();

340

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

?>
</body>
</html>
3 Save the program in C:\Apache24\htdocs in a folder as delete.php
4 Run the Apache services from windows services
5 Open the browser and type the following address
http://localhost/foldername/
6 Click the index.html file to run and verify the output

341

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Write the PHP code to establish a connection from a MySQL database named my_database hosted
on localhost, using a username and a password.
2 Write the PHP code to connect to the database, execute a query to retrieve data from a table named
users, and then display the results on a webpage.
3 Write PHP code to connect to the database, insert a new product record with specific values in to a
table named products and handle any potential errors during the insertion process.
4 Write PHP code to connect to the database, update existing records in a MySQL database table named
orders. update specific order records with new values, and ensure that the updates are applied
successfully.
5 Write PHP code to connect to the database, delete specific customer records based on certain criteria
from a MySQL database table named customers.

342

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 61

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 62 : Create a project on PHP & MySQL for

online library management
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create a project for online library management using PHP & MySQL.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with latest configuration • Apache web server
• Operating system: windows 10 or 11 • PHP
• Text editor • MySQL server
• Web browser

Procedure
Project:
Develop a web-based application to manage a library’s book collection, users, loans, and other functionalities.
Technologies:
Front-end: HTML, CSS, JavaScript (optional)
Back-end: PHP
Database: MySQL
System Modules:
1 User Management:
User registration and login (including different user roles, e.g., admin, librarian, member) User
profile management (update details, password change)
2 Book Management:
Add, edit, and delete book information (title, author, genre, publication date, availability)
Search books by various criteria (title, author, genre, keywords)
View detailed information about each book (summary, reviews, borrowed history)
3 Loan Management:
Borrow and return books (check user eligibility, availability, due dates)
Generate loan reports (individual, overdue, most popular books)
Set and manage loan periods and fines
4 Additional Features (optional):
Book reservation system
Online reading platform for eBooks
User reviews and ratings for books
Recommendations based on user borrowing history
Inventory management (track book condition, purchase new books)

343
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Database Design:
Tables: Users, Books, Loans, Genres, Authors, etc.
Relationships: Users can borrow Books, Books can have multiple Loans, etc.
Implement data integrity constraints and triggers for efficient management.
Development Approach:
Implement modules iteratively, starting with core functionalities.
Use clear coding practices and modular design for maintainability.
Validate user input to prevent security vulnerabilities.
Implement user authentication and authorization for different roles.
Testing and Deployment:
Thoroughly test all functionalities manually and with automated tools.
Deploy the application on a web server accessible to users.
Evaluation and Future Improvements:
Gather user feedback and address issues during maintenance.
Implement new features based on user needs and feedback.
Consider performance optimization and scalability for large datasets.
Additional Notes:
This is a basic outline, and specific modules and features can be adjusted based on the needs and
requirements.
Research existing open-source library management systems for inspiration and potential libraries to utilize.
Always keep security and data privacy in mind when developing and deploying the system.

344

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 62

 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Module 5 : Advance Data Analysis Using Excel

EXERCISE 63 : Protect sheet using password
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• protect your Excel Sheet and Work Book.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
TASK 1: To protect a sheet using a password in Microsoft Excel, follow these steps
1 Open your Excel Workbook:
• Launch Microsoft Excel and open the workbook containing the sheet you want to protect.
2 Navigate to the Sheet:
• Go to the sheet that you want to protect.

345
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Select the “Review” Tab:

• Click on the “Review” tab in the Excel ribbon at the top.
4 Click on “Protect Sheet”:
• In the “Changes” group, you will find the “Protect Sheet” option. Click on it.

5 Set Protection Options:

• A “Protect Sheet” dialog box will appear. Here, you can set various protection options:

346
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Enter a password in the “Password to unprotect sheet” field. This password will be required to unprotect the
sheet later.

• Choose specific options such as allowing users to select locked cells, format cells, insert rows, insert columns,
etc.
• Click on “OK” when you are done.
6 Re-enter Password (Optional):

• If you set a password, you will be prompted to re-enter it to confirm.

7 Save Your Workbook:
• It’s a good practice to save your workbook after protecting the sheet.
Now, the selected sheet is protected, and users will need to enter the password to make changes based on
the options you’ve chosen.
Keep in mind that if you forget the password, there is no way to recover it. Make sure to remember the
password or keep a backup of your workbook without the protection.
These steps apply to Microsoft Excel versions like Excel 2013, Excel 2016, Excel 2019, and Excel for Microsoft
365. The exact steps might vary slightly depending on the version you are using.
To protect a Work Book using a password in Microsoft Excel, follow these steps:

347
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Open your Excel Workbook: Open the Excel workbook that you want to protect.

2 Click on the “File” Tab: Click on the “File” tab in the Ribbon to access the Backstage view.

348
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Select “Info” from the menu: In the Backstage view, select the “Info” option from the menu on the left.

4 Click on “Protect Workbook”: Under the “Info” section, you will find an option called “Protect Workbook.”
Click on it.

349
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Choose a Protection Method:

• If you want to add a password to open the workbook, choose “Encrypt with Password.”

6 Enter the Password: If you selected “Encrypt with Password,” enter a password and click “OK.”

Note: Make sure to remember the password, as it will be required to unprotect the workbook.

350
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

7 Confirm the Password: If prompted, confirm the password by entering it again and click “OK.”

8 Save the Workbook: Save the workbook to apply the protection. Your workbook is now protected, and users
will need the password to open or modify it.

351
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Related Exercises:
1 Create a ‘SalesData.xlsx’ Excel file and protect the ‘SalesData’ sheet using the password ‘Secure123.’
2 Create a ‘Confidential.xlsx’ Excel file and protect the ‘Confidential’ sheet using the password ‘Secret789’.
Modify the password from ‘Secret789’ to ‘Classified987.’ Ensure that the new password is required to
unprotect the sheet.

352
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 63
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 64 : Use flash fill techniques

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use flash fill techniques in your worksheet.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
TASK 1: Given a column of full names use Flash Fill to split them into separate columns for first and last
names
1 Data Preparation:

2 Activate Flash Fill:

• In the adjacent cell where you want to apply Flash Fill, start typing the pattern you want Excel
to recognize.
• For example, if you want to extract first names, type the first name in the adjacent cell.

353
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Execute Flash Fill:

• Press Ctrl + E or go to the “Data” tab on the ribbon, and in the “Data Tools” group, click on “Flash Fill.”

4 Review and Confirm:

• Excel will attempt to recognize the pattern and automatically fill the cells below with the expected
results ie, all First Name will be displayed in the below cells.

354
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 64
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Similar steps can be applied in the Last Name to get the result.

TASK 2: From a column containing full email addresses and other text, use Flash Fill to extract only the
email addresses
1 Data Preparation:

355
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 64
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Activate Flash Fill:

In the adjacent cell where you want to apply Flash Fill, start typing the pattern you want Excel to recognize.

3 Execute Flash Fill:

Press Ctrl + E or go to the “Data” tab on the ribbon, and in the “Data Tools” group, click on “Flash Fill.”

356
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 64
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Review and Confirm:

Excel will attempt to recognize the pattern and automatically fill the cells below with the expected results.

Related Exercises:
1 Extract the first names from the list of full names using Flash Fill?

Full Names First Names

John Doe
Jane Smith
Alice Johnson
Bob Brown

2 Separate the email addresses into usernames and domains using Flash Fill.

Email Addresses Username Domain

[email protected]

[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]

Hint: Separate the first email address into the “Username” and “Domain” columns (e.g., “john” in the
Username column and “example.com” in the Domain column.

357
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 64
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 65 : Perform Goal Seek, Solver & Scenarios on

Data

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• perform Goal seek on data sheet to achieve your target
• use excel solver for data optimization & complex problem solving
• use scenario for various data sheet analysis.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
a Goal Seek :
Goal Seek in Excel is a feature that allows you to find the value of a particular cell that achieves a desired result
in another cell by adjusting the value of one input cell. It’s often used in financial modeling, engineering, and
other fields where you need to determine the input necessary to achieve a specific outcome.
TASK 1: Imagine you are managing the financial data for a company. The NET SALES are determined by
the formula NET SALES = GROSS SALES * (PROFIT/100), and the ANNUAL PROFIT is the sum
of the net sales from four quarters. Your goal is to set a target ANNUAL PROFIT (23, 00,000)
and use the Goal Seek function to find the required PROFIT percentage for each quarter to
achieve this target
1 Create an Excel table with the following columns:

Sales Details
Quarter Gross Sales Profit Net Sale
Q1 ₹ 2,850,000 20
Q2 ₹ 3,155,000 20
Q3 ₹ 2,940,318 20
Q4 ₹0 20

Annual Profit
Net Profit ₹ 2,300,000

2 Formulas
a In cell C3 (Profit (%) for Q1), enter the initial profit percentage (e.g., 20%).
b In cell D9(Net Profit), enter the target annual profit value (e.g., ₹ 2,300,000).

358
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

c In cell D3 (Net Sales for Q1), enter the formula and press Enter Key.

Drag it in the below cells to get the Net Sales Value in Q2, Q3 & Q4 as shown below:

359
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 In cell D8 (SUM of NET SALES), enter the formula to sum the NET SALES from all four quarters:

4 Use Goal Seek

a Select cell D8 (SUM of Net Sales).
b Go to the “Data” tab in the Excel ribbon.

360
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

c Under “Data Tools,” find and click on “What-If Analysis,” then select “Goal Seek.”

361
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Set Goal Seek Parameters

In the Goal Seek dialog box:
• Set “Set cell” to the cell containing the SUM of Net Sales (D8).
• Set “To value” to the desired Target PROFIT (23,00,000).
• Set “By changing cell” to the cell containing the initial PROFIT percentage for Q4 (B6).

5 Run Goal Seek

Click “OK” in the Goal Seek dialog box. Excel will perform calculations to find the required PROFIT percentage
for each quarter to achieve the target Annual Profit.

362
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Review the Result

Excel will automatically adjust the PROFIT percentages for each quarter to achieve the target Annual Profit of
2,300,000.

TASK 2: You want to use Goal Seek to determine the number of units that need to be produced to
achieve a target production cost of 50,0000, assuming fixed costs of 20,0000 and a variable
cost per unit of 150
1 Set Up the Initial Table
Create an Excel table with the following columns:

2 Formulas
1 In cell B4 (Number of Units), enter the initial number of units (e.g., 1,000).
2 In cell C4(Production Cost per Unit), enter the formula:

3 Press Enter

363
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Use Goal Seek

1 Select cell C4 (Production Cost per Unit).
2 Go to the “Data” tab in the Excel ribbon.
3 Under “Data Tools,” find and click on “What-If Analysis,” then select “Goal Seek.”

4 Set Goal Seek Parameters

In the Goal Seek dialog box:
• Set “Set cell” to the cell containing the Production Cost per Unit (C4).
• Set “To value” to the desired Target Production Cost (Rs. 500,000).
• Set “By changing cell” to the cell containing the Number of Units (B4).

364
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 Run Goal Seek

Click “OK” in the Goal Seek dialog box. Excel will perform calculations to find the required Number of Units to
achieve the target Production Cost.

Related Exercises:
1 You are managing a project budget, and the total project cost (Total CostTotal Cost) is determined by the
formula:
Total Cost=Fixed Costs+(Variable Cost per Unit×Number of Units)Total Cost=Fixed Costs+(Variable Cost
per Unit×Number of Units)
You want to use Goal Seek to determine the required number of units if the fixed costs are $10,000, and the
target total cost is $25,000.
2 In a manufacturing process, the production time per unit (Production TimeProduction Time) is determined
by the formula:
Production Time=Fixed Time+(Variable Time per Unit×Number of Units)Production Time=Fixed Time+
(Variable Time per Unit×Number of Units)
You want to use Goal Seek to determine the required number of units if the fixed time is 5 hours, and the
target production time is 20 hours.

b Excel Solver:
Excel Solver is a powerful tool used for optimization and solving complex problems by finding the best
solution based on a set of constraints. It is commonly used in operations research, engineering, finance, and
other fields where optimization is required
Add Solver to your Excel worksheet
The Solver add-in is added with all versions of Microsoft Excel though it is not enabled by default. You need
to manually add Solver to your Excel worksheet. To incorporate a Solver into your Excel worksheet, follow
the below-given steps.

365
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Open your Excel worksheet, click on Files-> Options.

2 The MS Excel options dialog box will appear. From the left side of the pane, click on the Add-Ins options.

366
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 The Add-Ins screen will be displayed in the center. At the bottom of the screen where the Manage box is
located, make sure that the add-ins option is selected in its field. Click on Go.

4 The Add-Ins dialog box will appear. Check the Solver ‘Add-ins’ box and click on the OK button.

367
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 That’s it; it will add the Solver tool to your Excel Worksheet.
6 The Solver add-ins programming tool is located on the Data tab, in the Analysis group.

TASK 1: Application of Excel Solver to Get Maximize Profit of Products

This company has some constraints that must be met to produce products:
• The combined production capacity is 300 units per day.
• The company needs 50 units of Software to fill an existing order.
• The company needs 40 units of Computer to fill an expected order.
• The company needs 40 units of Networking Kit to fill an existing order.

Step 1: First, go to the Data tab on your ribbon.

• Then select Solver from the Analysis group.

368
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2:
• Select cell E8 as the objective cell / Set Target Cell of the Solver Parameter box.
• Besides the To: options select Max as we are trying the maximize the value of the cell.

Step 3:
• In the By Changing Variable Cells, select the cell values we are mainly focusing on changing. Here, they
belong to the range C5:C7.

Step 4:
• Now add the constraints by clicking on the Add button on the right of the box.

369
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• The company needs 50 units of Software to fill an existing order.

• The company needs 40 units of Computer to fill an expected order.

• The company needs 40 units of Networking Kit to fill an existing order.

• The combined production capacity is 300 units per day.

370
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 5:
• Once you are done with all the steps above, click on Solve at the bottom of the box.

Step 6:
• After that, the Solver Results box will appear.
• Now select the options and reports you want to prefer in this box. For the demonstration, we are choosing
to enable the Keep Solver Solution option only.

• Click on OK button, then you will get the output like this:

371
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Related Exercise:
Question1 : Employee Scheduling
You are a manager responsible for scheduling employees for a customer service department. You want to
minimize the total number of hours scheduled while ensuring adequate coverage during peak hours.

Shift Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday

9am - 5pm 4 3 4 5 4
1pm - 9pm 5 4 3 4 5
5pm - 1am 3 4 3 4 3

Question: How should you schedule employees for each shift to minimize total hours scheduled while
meeting staffing requirements for each day?
Using Solver:
1 For each example, set up the objective function to maximize or minimize.
2 Define the decision variables and constraints based on the problem.
3 Access the Solver tool in Excel, specify the objective cell, decision variables, and constraints.
4 Run Solver to find the optimal solution.

c Scenarios on data
Excel scenarios allow you to create and save different sets of values that can be quickly substituted into your
worksheet
TASK 1:
1 Create Dataset with Proper Parameters
Suppose, that we are going to sell a book and would like to know how the Sale Units, Price per Unit, and
Variable Cost per Unit can affect the final profits. The profit is dependent on Sale Units (Cell B2), Price per
Unit (Cell B3), and the Variable Cost per Unit (Cell B5). Therefore, type the below formula in cell B7.
= B3*B4-B5-B6*B3

372
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Make Scenario Manager

Now if you want to know how to use scenario manager in Excel, let’s set up a Scenario Manager. To do that,
follow the instructions below:
• First of all, from your Data tab, go to,
Data → Forecast → What-If Analysis → Scenario Manager

• As a result, a Scenario Manager dialogue box will appear in front of you. From the dialog box, click on Add
option.

373
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• In the prompted Add Scenario dialogue box, fill in the required details. Enter a name (Worst Case) for the
Scenario name Add any comment that you wish to into the Comment box. Or you can also leave it blank.
As for the Changing cells, fill in all the reference cells (B3,B4,B6 in this case) that contain the input
values. Please note that the references must be separated by commas. Or, just press the CTRL key on
your keyboard and select all the cells, one by one, that contain the input values. At last, press the OK
option.

• Hence, the Scenario Values dialogue box pops up. Fill in the Scenario Values dialog box with the input
values that define the worst case, and press the Add option to add another scenario. Click on OK, and
the Worst Case scenario will be successfully created.

• Since we’d like to create another scenario, we click on Add. After clicking on Add, another Add Scenario
dialogue box will appear. Use the same approach that we applied when creating the Worst Case scenario
to build the Best Case scenario. Please note that Excel has set changing cells for the worst-case
scenario as the default changing cells for the best-case scenario. The details are given in the following
screenshot.

374
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• With the same approach, create the Most Likely Case Here the below screenshot presents the details.

• You can also use the same above approach to creating other scenarios if you have other combinations
of input values. In this example, we assume that there are only 3 scenarios available and thus we click
on the OK button in the Scenario Values dialogue box. Now, you can see that three scenarios have been
successfully created and they are listed in sequence. Click on Close, and the Scenario Manager dialogue
box will be closed.

375
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 View Different Scenarios

So far, you have saved all of those 3 scenarios in your workbook. If you go to the Data tab and click on What-If
Analysis in Forecast Group, then choose Scenario Manager in the drop-down, you will see the same
Scenario Manager dialogue box as that is shown in the below screenshot.

The Scenario Manager dialogue box is no longer blank. Now you can view the result from each of the scenarios
by simply double-clicking on any scenario.
To view a specific scenario and its corresponding outputs, you can click on that scenario and then click
on the Show button at the bottom. For example, if we double-click on Best Case, the input values in the
Excel worksheet will change into what has been filled for Best Case, and the output value will be calculated
automatically based on the formula in cell B7. The dataset will change automatically.

376
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Create Scenario Summary Report in Excel

Excel can create a summary report based on the saved scenarios. Now let’s see how to make a summary
report. To do that, follow the instructions below:
• First of all, from your Data tab, go to,
Data → Forecast → What-If Analysis → Scenario Manager
• After that, a Scenario Manager dialogue box will appear in front of you. From the Scenario Manager
dialog box, click on the Summary option.

377
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• After clicking on Summary, a Scenario Summary dialog box appears for you to put Result cells (B7 in this
case) and choose between Scenario summary. At last, press the OK option.

As a result, you will be able to create the scenario summary report

Related Exercises:
Question 1: Sales Projection Scenarios
Suppose you have a sales projection table like this:

Month Scenario A Scenario B Scenario C

January 1000 1200 900
February 1100 1300 950
March 1050 1250 920

378
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Question: How can you use Excel scenarios to compare different sales projections for the first quarter?
Steps to do :
1 Fill in the actual budget allocations in the “Actual” column.
2 Go to the “Data” tab, click on “What-If Analysis,” and select “Scenario Manager.”
3 Click on “Add” to create new scenarios, naming them as needed (e.g., Scenario 1, Scenario 2).
4 Input different budget allocations for each scenario.
5 By switching between scenarios, you can compare the impact of different budget allocations on departmental
spending.
Question 2: Project Timeline Scenarios
Imagine a project timeline table like this:

Task Duration (Days) Scenario 1 Scenario 2

Research 10
Development 20
Testing 15
Deployment 5

Question: How can you use scenarios to analyze different project completion timelines?
Steps to do:
1 Enter the duration of each task in the “Duration (Days)” column.
2 Go to the “Data” tab, click on “What-If Analysis,” and select “Scenario Manager.”
3 Create new scenarios (e.g., Scenario 1, Scenario 2) and input different durations for each task.
4 By comparing scenarios, you can assess how adjustments in task durations impact the overall project timeline.

379
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 65
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 66 : Use different types of cell references

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use different types of cell references in your tasks.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
In Excel, there are three main types of cell references: relative, absolute, and mixed. Using different types of cell
references can be helpful when creating formulas that you plan to copy or fill to other cells.
TASK 1: Different types of Cell References
Method 1: Relative Cell Reference
A relative cell reference adjusts when you copy the formula to other cells.
In a scenario where the objective is to establish a formula P (Price) equals INR (Indian Rupees), the suggestion is
to create a single formula in cell E3 and then copy it to other rows to avoid the need for a new formula for each
row. The emphasis is on using relative references to ensure the formula calculates the total for each item
correctly.

380
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 1: Select the cell that will contain the formula. In our example, we’ll select cell E3.

Step 2: Enter the formula to calculate the desired value. In our example, we’ll type=(C3*D3)*(12/100). And
Press Enter on your keyboard. The formula will be calculated, and the result will be displayed in the cell.

381
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 3: Select the cell E3. The fill handle will appear in the bottom-right corner of the cell.

Step 4: Click and drag the fill handle over the cells. Select cells E3:E12, Release the mouse. The formula will be
copied to the selected cells with relative references, displaying the result in each cell.

Note: Double-click the filled cells to check formulas for accuracy. The relative cell references should
be different for each cell, depending on their rows.

382
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Method 2: Absolute references

Excel Absolute Reference refers to a’ locked’ reference so that the address of its corresponding row and column
does not change when copied.
• $A$2 –Denote the column and the row do not changed when copied
In the example below, we’re going to use cell E3 (which contains the Interest rate at 12%) to calculate the
interest for each item.

Step 1: Input the formula in the selected cell (E3) to compute the desired value. In this instance, the formula will
be =(C3*D3)*($F$3), with $F$3 being specified as an absolute reference.

383
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2: Press Enter on your keyboard. The formula will calculate, and the result will display in the cell.

Step 3: Click and drag the fill handle across the cells where you intend to replicate the formula. Once you
release the mouse, the formula will be copied to the designated cells, retaining the absolute reference, and the
values will be automatically calculated in each corresponding cell.

Double-click the filled cells to check their formulas for accuracy. The absolute reference should be the same for
each cell, while the other references are relative to the cell’s row.

384
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Method 3: Mixed references

A Mixed cell reference is a mixture of both relative and absolute cell reference. In mixed cell reference,
dollar signs are attached to either the row letter or the column number.
• $A2 – Denote the column does not changed when copied
• A$2 – Denote the row does not changed when copied.

Step 1: Input the formula in the selected cell (E3) to compute the desired value. In this instance, the formula
will be = ($C3*$D3)($F$3), with $F$3 being specified as an absolute reference and $C3 and $D3 is the mixed
reference.

385
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2: Press Enter on your keyboard. The formula will calculate, and the result will display in the cell.

Step 3: Click and drag the fill handle across the cells where you intend to replicate the formula. Once you
release the mouse, the formula will be copied to the designated cells, retaining the absolute reference, and the
values will be automatically calculated in each corresponding cell

386
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Related Exercises:
Question 1: Sales Commission Calculation
Suppose you work as a sales representative and earn a commission based on the total sales amount. Your
commission rate is 5% of total sales. You have a table with sales data for different months.

Month Sales Amount ($) Commission Earned ($)

January $5,000
February $7,500
March $6,200
April $8,000
May $9,500
Calculate the commission earned for each month using a formula with absolute references?
Question 2: Product Inventory Management
Suppose you run a small retail store and want to track the inventory levels of different products. You have a
table with the product names and their current inventory counts:

Product Inventory Count

Product A 100
Product B 50
Product C 75
Product D 120
Product E 80

Calculate the percentage of inventory remaining for each product using a formula with absolute references?
Solution: You can calculate the percentage of inventory remaining as (Inventory Count / Total Inventory) * 100%.
Question 3: Monthly Expense Analysis
Suppose you are analyzing your monthly expenses and want to calculate the percentage of each expense
category relative to the total expenses. You have a table with the expense categories and their amounts:

Category Amount ($)

Groceries $300
Dining Out $200
Utilities $150
Transportation $100
Entertainment $150

Calculate the percentage of each expense category relative to the total expenses using a formula with relative
references?
Solution: You can calculate the percentage of each expense category relative to the total expenses by dividing
the amount of each category by the total expenses, multiplied by 100. Here’s the formula you can use in the
“Percentage of Total Expenses (%)” column:
= (B2 / SUM(B$2:B$6)) * 100

387
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 66
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 67 : Use R1C1 notation

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use R1C1 notation in your worksheet.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
R1C1 notation is an alternative way of referencing cells in Microsoft Excel, as opposed to the more common A1
notation. In R1C1 notation:
• R stands for Row.
• C stands for Column.
• The numbers following R and C represent the row and column numbers,
respectively. The basic format of an R1C1 reference is R[row]C[column].
For example:
• R1C1 refers to the cell in the first row and first column.
• R2C3 refers to the cell in the second row and third column.
In addition to explicit cell references, you can use relative references in R1C1 notation. For instance:
• RC[-1] refers to the cell in the same row and one column to the left of the active cell/current cell.
• R[2]C refers to the cell two rows below and in the same
column. How to Switch to R1C1 Notation in Excel:
1 Open Excel.

388
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Go to the “File” tab. Now you can see the Excel in A1 reference style.

3 Select “Options.”from File menu

389
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 In the Excel Options dialog box, go to the “Formulas” category.

5 Look for the “Working with formulas” section.

6 Check the box for “R1C1 reference style.”
7 Click “OK” to apply the changes.

390
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Once switched, you’ll notice that the column headers change from letters (A, B, C, etc.) to numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.),
indicating the R1C1 notation mode.

TASK 1: Sum of Two numbers using R1C1

Step 1: Switch to R1C1 Notation
Follow the steps from the previous answer to switch to R1C1 notation.

391
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2: Write the Formula

In cell R3C3, enter the following formula using R1C1 notation:

This formula instructs Excel to sum the value in the cell two columns to
the left (column A ie, C[-2]) from the current cell(R3C3) and the value in
the cell one column to the left (column Bie, C[-1])).
R3C3= RC[-2]+RC[-1]
Step 3: Press Enter
Press Enter to execute the formula. Excel will calculate the sum and
display the result in cell R3C3.

Step 4:
Drag down from R3C3:R7C3 to obtain the result.
Result:

392
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2 : Using R1C1 Reference in VBA

Step 1: Open the workbook in Excel.

Step 2: Access VBA Editor: Press Alt + F11 to open the Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) editor.

Step 3: Insert a Module

• In the VBA editor, ensure that your workbook is selected in the left Project Explorer window.
• If there isn’t an existing module, right-click on your workbook name, choose Insert, and then click on Module.

393
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 4: Write the Code:

Explanation:
1 Sub R1C1Style(): This line defines the beginning of a subroutine named R1C1Style. Sub indicates the start
of a subroutine, followed by the name of the subroutine (R1C1Style), and parentheses to denote that it
doesn’t take any arguments.
2 Selection.FormulaR1C1 = “=rc[-2]*rc[-1]”: This line sets the formula of the selected cell or range using R1C1
reference style. Here’s the breakdown:
• Selection: Refers to the currently selected cell or range in Excel.
• .FormulaR1C1: Indicates that the formula will be assigned using R1C1 reference style.
• =: Assignment operator used to assign the following formula to the selected cell(s).
• “=rc[-2]*rc[-1]”: The formula being assigned. In R1C1 notation:
• rc[-2]: Refers to the cell in the same row (relative reference) and two columns to the left.
• *: Represents the multiplication operator.
• rc[-1]: Refers to the cell in the same row (relative reference) and one column to the left.
3 End Sub: Marks the end of the subroutine R1C1Style. This line tells VBA that the subroutine has finished and
returns control to the main program.
In summary, this subroutine sets the formula of the selected cell(s) to multiply the value in the cell two columns to
the left by the value in the cell one column to the left, using R1C1 reference style.
Step 5: Close VBA Editor:
• Close the VBA editor by clicking the close button or pressing Alt + Q.
Step 6: Run the Macro:
• Press Alt + F8 to open the “Macro” dialog.
• Choose the macro named “ ‘r1c1.xlsm’!Module2.R1C1Style” from the list.

394
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Click “Run.”

Result:

395
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Related Exercises:
1 Create Mark Sheet of Students Using R1C1 Reference in VBA and Calculate the following:
• Calculate Total and Average Marks
• Calculate Average

Student Name Python JAVA PHP Total Average

John 80 75 85

Mary 85 90 80

Alice 70 65 75

Bob 75 80 70

2 Create an EMI Calculator Using R1C1 Reference in VBA

EMI Calculator

Amount

Rate of Interest

Year

EMI

396
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 67
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 68 : Use array formula

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use various array formula in your tasks.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
TASK 1: Calculating Total Marks of Students
In our first task we’ll calculate the total marks for each student using an array formula in Excel. It’s simple and
easy. Just follow along.

Step 1: In Office 365, Select cell E5 and enter the following formula.
=C5:C14+D5:D14

397
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• After that, press ENTER.

Note: Check the image carefully until you see a light blue line around the cells in Column E.
This is because they are in an array. We didn’t use the Fill Handle or anything like that to fill
these cells.

Here, we’re using Microsoft Excel 365 version. So, we can run the array formula by pressing ENTER. But, in the
older version do the following steps.
• So, first select E5:E14 and type the above formula in cell E5.
• After that, press CTRL + SHIFT + ENTER at a time.

Note: After pressing these buttons, a pair of curly brackets will automatically be applied within
two sides of the formula. You don’t have to write them manually.

Also, you can’t make any changes inside the cell of an array. Excel will not allow you to do this. If you ever try to
do this kind of thing, the following phenomena will happen.
• Here, go to cell E8 and change the cell element to 5.
• After that, press ENTER.
Immediately, Excel will show a warning box on the display like the image below.

398
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2 : Determining Highest Marks Obtained

Now, we want to discover the highest marks obtained by the students on any of the two subjects. So, let’s begin.
• Firstly, we’ve made an output range in B16:C16.
• Secondly, select cell C16 and write down the formula below.
=MAX(C5:D14)
Here, the MAX function returns the maximum value among the numbers in this range.
• Lastly, press ENTER on the keyboard.

TASK 3 : Excel Array Formula with Multiple Criteria

In this task, will show an array formula that will return a two-dimensional array with multiple criteria. Here, will be
got the Name, Section, Subject, and Mark in columns B, C, D, and E consecutively. Also, will got Section A and
Maths as the Subject in cells in the B16:E17 range
Now, we’ll filter out the above array in the B5:E14 range with the criteria in the B16:E17 range. We can clearly
see there are two criteria. One is Section, another is Subject. So, obviously, there are multiple criteria for
filtering. So, without further delay, let’s dive in!
• At first, copy the headings in the B4:E4 range and paste them into the B19:E19 range.

399
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Then, go to cell B20 and paste the following formula into that cell.
=FILTER(B5:E14,(C5:C14=B17)*(D5:D14=D17),””)
Here, B5:E14 represents the range of the array. C5:C14 serves as the Section column. B17 performs as the
section to be filtered. D5:D14 means the Subject column. Lastly, D17 acts as the subject to be filtered.
The FILTER function has three arguments. Here, B5:E14 is the array argument. And (C5:C14=B17)*(D5:D14=D17)
is the include argument. Basically, this works like a Boolean array; it carries the condition or criteria for filtering.
In this case, we’ve two criteria combined by a (*) sign.
• After that, tap ENTER.

Note: Filter function available in Excel 2021 and Above Versions.

400
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4 : Computing Total Cost based on Quantity

This example is actually fun to learn. You can apply this theory to other problems as well. Here, in Column B,
we have the Quantity of Unit. And, in Column C, there is their corresponding Unit Price. In essence, we want to
know how much this will cost if we order a certain quantity of units.

From the picture above, we can see that the unit price is decreasing gradually with the increase in order amount.
So, it will cost us less if we order in bulk. Let’s see it in action.
• Initially, go to cell C12 and put the following formula into the cell.
=C11*IF(C11>=101,C9, IF(C11>=51, C8, IF(C11>=21, C7, IF( C11>=11, C6, IF(C11>=1, C5, “”)))))
Formula Breakdown
• IF(C11>=1, C5, ” “) →The IF function checks whether a condition is met, and returns one value if TRUE,
and another one if FALSE. Here, C11>=1 is the logical_test argument which compares the value of the C11
cell with 1. If this value is greater than or equal to 1 then the function returns the value of cell C5
(value_if_true argument) otherwise it returns blank(value_if_false argument).
Output → 20
• IF( C11>=11, C6, IF(C11>=1, C5, “”)) → this becomes IF( C11>=11, C6, 20).
Output → 19
• IF(C11>=21, C7, IF( C11>=11, C6, IF(C11>=1, C5, “”))) → this becomes IF(C11>=21, C7, 19).
Output → 16
• IF(C11>=51, C8, IF(C11>=21, C7, IF( C11>=11, C6, IF(C11>=1, C5, “”)))) → this becomes IF(C11>=51,
C8, 16).
Output → 15
• IF(C11>=101,C9, IF(C11>=51, C8, IF(C11>=21, C7, IF( C11>=11, C6, IF(C11>=1, C5, “”))))) → this becomes
IF(C11>=101,C9, 15).
Output → 13
• C11*IF(C11>=101,C9, IF(C11>=51, C8, IF(C11>=21, C7, IF( C11>=11, C6, IF(C11>=1, C5, “”))))) → this
becomes C11*15.
Output → 80*15 → 1200
• Following this, press the ENTER key.

401
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 5 : Finding out Average of Positive Numbers

In this worksheet, you see there are some numbers in Column B of the worksheet. Some numbers are positive,
and some numbers are negative. We are going to find out the average of the positive numbers in this range.

You can do it in two ways. The first way is: separate the positive numbers manually, create a new range, and at the
end use the AVERAGE function to find out the average of the positive numbers. Another way is: we can use an
array formula. It will save us time and effort. So, without further delay, let’s see how we can do it.
Steps:
• Primarily, go to cell C5 and enter the following formula.
=AVERAGE(IF(B5:B14>0,B5:B14,FALSE))
Formula Breakdown
Observe closely the arguments of the IF function. You know how the IF function works. If the first argument of the
function is TRUE, then the second argument is returned by the IF function. If the first argument is FALSE, then
the third argument is returned by the IF function. Arguments are separated by commas.
In our case, the third argument is FALSE, so if the first argument is FALSE, then the IF function will return the
FALSE statement.

402
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

OKAY! The main focus is now on the first argument and the second argument. You see the first argument is a
range, and the second argument is also a range. And the whole formula is an array formula.
• IF(B5:B14>0,B5:B14,FALSE) → here Excel will create an array internally with the positive numbers and
False statements.
• Output → {15, FALSE, 14, FALSE, FALSE, 45, 78, 65, 54, FALSE}
AVERAGE(IF(B5:B14>0,B5:B14,FALSE)) → this becomes AVERAGE({15, FALSE, 14, FALSE, FALSE, 45,
78, 65, 54, FALSE}).
• Output → 45.167
The AVERAGE function finds out the average of the values in the array, except the FALSE values, the False
values are not numbers, so the AVERAGE function neglects the FALSE values.
• As usual, press ENTER.

Related Exercises:
• You are managing a bookstore and want to calculate the total revenue generated by each genre of books over
a specific period. Create an Excel spreadsheet with the following details:
• Column A: Book titles.
• Column B: Genre of each book.
• Column C: Unit price for each book.
• Column D: Number of units sold for each book.
• Row 1: Use an array formula to calculate the total revenue generated by each genre by summing the
revenue from each book sold in that genre. Ensure that the array formula adjusts correctly for each genre
as you copy it across.
• You are organizing a charity event and want to track the donations received from different sources. Create an
Excel spreadsheet with the following details:
• Column A: Donation amounts.
• Column B: Donation sources (e.g., Individuals, Corporations, Organizations, etc.).
• Row 1: Use an array formula to calculate the total donations received from each source by summing the
donations from each source. Ensure that the array formula adjusts correctly for each donation source as
you copy it across.

403
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• You are analyzing the performance of different marketing campaigns and want to calculate the conversion
rate for each campaign based on the number of leads generated and the number of conversions. Create an
Excel spreadsheet with the following details:
• Column A: Campaign names.
• Column B: Number of leads generated by each campaign.
• Column C: Number of conversions from leads for each campaign.
• Row 1: Use an array formula to calculate the conversion rate for each campaign by dividing the number
of conversions by the number of leads generated. Ensure that the array formula adjusts correctly for each
campaign as you copy it across.
• You are managing a restaurant and want to analyze the popularity of different menu items. Create an Excel
spreadsheet with the following details:
• Column A: Menu item names.
• Columns B through G: Weekly sales figures for each menu item for the past six weeks (varying values).
• Row 1: Use an array formula to calculate the total sales for each menu item by summing the sales figures
across all weeks. Ensure that the array formula adjusts correctly for each menu item as you copy it across.

404
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 68
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 69 : Audit excel formula

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use various Audit Excel formulas in your task for trouble shooting errors in large data sheets
• check the accuracy of financial reports quickly.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
TASK 1 : Trace Precedents
Trace Precedents displays tracer arrows from the cells showing the direction of information flow. You see a
blue box around the cells when this method is active. However, one can press this button multiple times to
catch additional levels.
• Choose a cell (D5), and visit the Trace Precedents option from the Formulas tab.

• As a result, we will see two arrows from cell (C5) and cell (C11) indicating towards cell (D5) as the interest
amount is calculated using the principal amount and interest rate.

405
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2: Trace Dependents

In order to visually highlights the cells that depend on the value of a selected cell, you can try the Trace
Dependents feature in Excel. This is a powerful tool for understanding the relationship between cells. Here,
let’s see how the interest rate is dependent on the cells.
• Simply, choose a cell (C11), and then visit the Trace Dependents feature from the Formulas tab.

• Finally, you will see the arrows from the cell (C11) to other cells indicating the cells that are dependent on the
value of the selected cell.

406
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Remove Arrows

After inserting arrows using the above features, you can also delete them by utilizing the Remove Arrows option.
• Start with, selecting the cell (C11) and clicking the Remove Arrows option from the Formulas tab

• Within a blink of an eye, the arrows will be removed.

TASK 4: Show Formulas

Show Formulas in Excel is a helpful tool that allows you to view the actual formulas within cells instead of their
calculated results. This feature offers transparency into complex calculations, aiding in formula debugging
and verification.
• While the worksheet is open, visit the Formulas tab and press the Show Formulas option.

407
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Immediately, all the cells with formulas will represent the formulas inside the cells.

TASK 5: Error Checking (Includes Error Checking, Trace Error, Circular References)
Sometimes while applying formulas, you will get errors like #DIV/0!, #VALUE!, #NAME? Errors. To check why it’s
happening you can visit Error Checking option from the Formula tab.
• Select a cell (E5), and hit the Error Checking option from the Formulas tab.

408
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Now, you can click the Help on this Error option to check in detail about the error

• As a result, a new window will open in your browser providing you details about the error and its solution.

• In order to trace from which cells these are happening, click the Trace Error option from the Formulas tab.

409
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Immediately, an arrow will appear to indicate the error and its corresponding cells.

TASK 6: Evaluate Formula

When you are dealing with complex formulas and you are having trouble understanding the formulas, at that time
you can visit the Evaluate Formula option to have a better understanding.
• Simply, choose a cell (E5) consisting of the formula and hit the Evaluate Formula option.

• Immediately, a window will open evaluating the formula.

• From there to evaluate more deeply click the Evaluate option.

410
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Another update will come describing the formula. Click Evaluate again to get the result.

• After completing the evaluation, you will get the cell value in the window.

411
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 7: Watch Window

While working with a large dataset sometimes you might need to look over some cell values immediately and all
time in a specific space. For that, you can add a watch window at the top of the spreadsheet. Here, we have
calculated the total monthly payment amount using the SUM function in Excel. Now we will add a watch window
for this specific cell.
• Choose a cell (C12), apply the below formula, and hit ENTER.
=SUM(E5:E9)

• Now choosing the cell (C12), hit the Watch Window feature from the Formulas tab.

• Within a glimpse, a window will open at the top of the spreadsheet showing cell value and formula. This
watch window is really a helpful tool for making a summary of your dataset. And if you scroll or jump to
another sheet the watch window will always be visible on that place.

412
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Related Exercises:
1 You are reviewing a complex financial model and want to trace precedents to understand how a particular
calculation is derived. Perform the following tasks:
• Identify a cell containing a formula that you want to audit.
• Use the “Trace Precedents” feature in Excel to visually trace the cells that contribute to the formula’s
calculation.
• Document the path of precedents to understand the formula’s logic.
2 You are troubleshooting errors in a large dataset and suspect that circular references may be causing incorrect
calculations. Perform the following tasks:
• Use the “Error Checking” feature in Excel to check for circular references within the worksheet.
• If circular references are found, analyze the affected cells to identify and resolve the circular dependency.
3 You are verifying the accuracy of a financial report and want to identify any external references to cells in other
workbooks. Perform the following tasks:
• Use the “Workbook Audit” feature in Excel to audit external references to cells in other workbooks.
• Review the list of external references and ensure that they are accurately referencing the intended data
sources.
4 You are collaborating on a spreadsheet with multiple colleagues and want to track changes made by each
user. Perform the following tasks:
• Enable the “Track Changes” feature in Excel to track changes made to the workbook by different users.
• Review the change history to identify who made specific changes and when they were made.

413
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 69
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 70 : Create and modify simple macros

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create simple macros
• modify macros.

Requirements
Tools/Materials
• PC/Laptop with Windows OS
• MS Excel 2013 or Higher

Procedure
TASK 1: Area of a rectangle
Step 1 : Open MS Excel and press Alt+F11 to activate Visual Basic Editor
Step 2: Develop the Interface ie., Place the required Controls from Developer tab in the Excel Sheet and Set the
Properties .

Step 2.1: To set the property Right Click on each controls (CommandButton1& CommandButton2) and select
‘properties’ from the drop down menu.

414
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2.2: Set the required properties as follows:

For Example:

Sl. No Control Property Value

1 CommndButton1 Name cmdarea

Caption Area
2 CommandButton2 Name cmdclear
Caption Clear

Step 3: Double Click on each Control and write down the Code .
Private Sub cmdarea_Click()
Dim length As Integer, breadth As Integer
length = Range(“B2”)
breadth = Range(“B3”)
Range(“A5”) = “Area is”
Range(“B5”) = length * breadth
End Sub
Private Sub cmdclear_Click()
Range(“A5,B2:B5”) = “ “
End Sub
Step 4 : Then save the workbook type as a ‘Excel Macro- Enabled Workbook’
Step 5: Run the Macro
Step 5.1: Click on the Design mode icon to turn of the Design mode .

415
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 5.2: Enter the values of Length in Cell B2 and Breadth in Cell B3 AND Click on the Area Button to view the
Area in the Cell B5.

CITS : IT & ITES - Computer

Software Application -
Exercise 70

Step 5.3: Clear Button is used to clear the input data and result .

416
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Explanation :
This VBA macro is designed to calculate the area of a rectangle based on the length and breadth entered into
specific cells in an Excel worksheet. Let’s break down the code:
1 Variable Declarations:
• Two integer variables, length and breadth, are declared to store the dimensions of the rectangle.
2 Assigning Values:
• The length variable is assigned the value of the cell B2, which presumably holds the length of the rectangle.
• The breadth variable is assigned the value of the cell B3, which presumably holds the breadth of the
rectangle.
3 Calculating Area:
• The area of the rectangle is calculated by multiplying the length and breadth variables.
• The result is then displayed in cell B5 of the Excel worksheet.
4 Displaying Result:
• The message “Area is” is displayed in cell A5, followed by the calculated area in cell B5.
Explanation Summary:
• The macro retrieves the length and breadth of a rectangle from specific cells in the Excel worksheet.
• It calculates the area of the rectangle using the formula: Area=length×breadthArea=length×breadth.
• The calculated area is displayed in another cell of the worksheet, along with a descriptive label.
This macro simplifies the process of calculating the area of a rectangle in Excel, allowing users to quickly
obtain results based on the provided dimensions.

TASK 2: Create and modify a simple macro in Excel to calculate Body Mass Index (BMI) based on user
input of weight in kilograms and height in meters
Step 1: Open Ms Excel and press Alt+F11 to activate VBE(Visual Basic Editor) and go to Insert Module as
follows:

417
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2: Type the following Sub Procedure and save it in a macro enabled work book
Sub Calculate_BMI()
Dim weight As Double
Dim height As Double
Dim bmi As Double
Dim result As String
‘ Prompt user to enter weight in kilograms
weight = InputBox(“Enter your weight in kilograms:”)
‘ Prompt user to enter height in meters
height = InputBox(“Enter your height in meters:”)
‘ Check if weight and height are greater than 0
If weight > 0 And height > 0 Then
‘ Calculate BMI using the formula: weight / (height * height)
bmi = weight / (height * height)
‘ Determine the BMI category
If bmi< 18.5 Then
result = “Underweight”
ElseIfbmi>= 18.5 And bmi< 25 Then
result = “Normal weight”
ElseIfbmi>= 25 And bmi< 30 Then
result = “Overweight”
Else
result = “Obese”
End If
‘ Display the calculated BMI and category
MsgBox “Your BMI is: “ &Round(bmi, 2) &vbCrLf& “BMI Category: “ & result

418
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Else
‘ Display error message if weight or height is not valid
MsgBox “Invalid input. Please enter valid weight and height.”
End If
End Sub
Step 3 : Run the Macro and view the result.

Output:

419
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Explanation:
This VBA subroutine named Calculate_BMI calculates the Body Mass Index (BMI) based on the weight and
height entered by the user and categorizes the BMI into different weight categories such as underweight,
normal weight, overweight, and obese. Here’s an explanation of the code:
1 Variable Declarations:
• weight, height, bmi: These variables of type Double are used to store the weight, height, and
calculated BMI, respectively.
• result: This variable of type String holds the category of BMI.
2 Prompt for Weight and Height:
• The user is prompted to enter their weight in kilograms and height in meters using the InputBox function.
3 Check for Valid Input:
• The code checks if the entered weight and height are greater than 0.
4 Calculate BMI:
• If the weight and height are valid, the BMI is calculated using the formula weight / (height * height).
5 Determine BMI Category:
• The BMI is categorized based on standard BMI ranges:
• BMI less than 18.5 is considered “Underweight”.
• BMI between 18.5 and 24.9 is considered “Normal weight”.
• BMI between 25 and 29.9 is considered “Overweight”.
• BMI 30 or greater is considered “Obese”.
6 Display Results:
• The calculated BMI, rounded to two decimal places using the Round function, along with its
corresponding category, is displayed in a message box using the MsgBox function.
7 Error Handling:
• If the user enters invalid input (weight or height less than or equal to 0), an error message is displayed
using MsgBox.
This subroutine provides a simple way to calculate BMI and categorize it, offering users insights into their weight
status.

420
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: Quadratic Equation Solver

Step 1: Develop the interface

Step 2: Set the property of the controls

421
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Property Box

S. No. Control Property Value

1 CommndButton1 Name cmdsolution

Caption Solution
2 CommandButton2 Name cmdclear
Caption Clear

Step 3: Double click on the Clear button and write down the following code:
Private Sub cmdclear_Click()
Range(“B2:B9,A6:A8”) = “ “
End Sub
Step 4: Double click on the Solution button and write down the following code:
Private Sub cmdsolution_Click()
Dim a As Integer, b As Integer, c As Integer
Dim d As Single, root1 As Single, root2 As Single
a = InputBox(“Enter the value of a”)
b = InputBox(“Enter the value of b”)
c = InputBox(“Enter the value of c”)
Range(“B2”) = a
Range(“B3”) = b
Range(“B4”) = c
d=b*b-4*a*c
Range(“A6”) = “Discriminent”
Range(“B6”) = Round(d, 2)
If d = 0 Then
root1 = -b / (2 *
a)
Range(“A7”) = “Root is “
Range(“B7”) = Round(root1, 2)
Range(“B9”) = “ Roots are real and Equal”
ElseIf d > 0 Then
root1 = (-b + Sqr(d)) / (2 * a)
root2 = (-b - Sqr(d)) / (2 * a)
Range(“A7”) = “Root1 is “
Range(“B7”) = Round(root1, 2)
Range(“A8”) = “Root2 is “
Range(“B8”) = Round(root2, 2)
Range(“B9”) = “ Roots are real and UnEqual”
Else
Range(“B9”) = “ Roots are imaginary”

422
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

End If
End Sub
Step 5: Then save the workbook type as a ‘Excel Macro- Enabled Workbook’
Step 6: Run the Macro and view the result.

423
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

This VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) macro is designed to solve quadratic equations of the form ax² + bx +
c = 0 and display the roots and nature of the roots (real and equal, real and unequal, or imaginary) in an Excel
worksheet.
Here’s an explanation of the macro:
1 Variable Declarations:
• Three integer variables a, b, and c are declared to store the coefficients of the quadratic equation.
• Three single precision variables d, root1, and root2 are declared to store the discriminant and roots of the
equation.
2 User Input:
• The macro prompts the user to input the values of a, b, and c using InputBoxes.
3 Calculating the Discriminant:
• The discriminant d is calculated using the formula: b2- 4ac
• The calculated discriminant is rounded to 2 decimal places.
4 Displaying the Discriminant:
• The calculated discriminant is displayed in cell B6 of the Excel worksheet under the heading “Discriminant”.
5 Determining the Roots:
• The macro checks the value of the discriminant d to determine the nature of the roots.
• If d is equal to 0, there is one real root, which is calculated and displayed.
• If d is greater than 0, there are two real roots, which are calculated and displayed.
• If d is less than 0, the roots are imaginary.
6 Displaying the Roots:
• The roots, along with their nature, are displayed in cells A7, B7 (for root 1), and A8, B8 (for root 2) of the
Excel worksheet.
• If the roots are real and equal or real and unequal, the nature of the roots is displayed in cell B9.
Explanation Summary:
• The macro prompts the user for coefficients of a quadratic equation.
• It calculates the discriminant and determines the nature of the roots.
• The roots and their nature are displayed in an Excel worksheet.
This macro offers a handy tool for quickly solving quadratic equations and understanding their nature within Excel.
Related Exercises:
1 Develop a macro to perform temperature conversion( Celsius to Fahrenheit and Vice versa)
2 Develop a macro for interest calculation(I=PNR)
3 Develop a macro to do Simple Arithmatic Operations

424
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 70
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 71 : Perform form controls and create simple

data entry form with macros
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• create simple data entry form with macros.

Procedure
User form is a customised interface, developed in VBA. It enables a user to interact, using a form, in an organised
and logical manner or to enter data and retrieve data with an Excel Worksheet or Run a VBA application.
• User Forms acts as a container in which you add multiple controls, each of which has a specific use and
associated properties.

TASK 1: Create a User Form – Employee Salary Details

• Step 1: Navigate to VBA Window by pressing Alt+F11 and Navigate to “Insert” Menu and select “User
Form”. Upon selecting, the user form is displayed as shown in the following screenshot.

• Step 2: Design the forms using the given controls.

425
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Step 3: After adding each control, the controls have to be named through property settings. Caption
corresponds to what appears on the form and name corresponds to the logical name that will be appearing
when you write VBA code for that element.

• Step 4: Add the code for the form load event by performing a right-click on the form and selecting ‘View Code’

426
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Step 5: Select ‘Userform’ from the objects drop-down and select ‘Initialize’ method as shown in the following
screenshot.

• Step 6: Upon Loading the form, ensure that the text boxes are
cleared. Private Sub UserForm_Initialize()
txtid.Value = “ “
txtname.Value = “ “
txtbp.Value = “ “
txtda.Value = “ “
txthra.Value = “”
txtded.Value = “ “
txtts.Value = “ “
txtns.Value = “ “
txtid.SetFocus
End Sub

427
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

when the user form is initialized, all text boxes’ contents are cleared or set to default values, and the focus is
set to the txtid text box. This ensures a clean and focused user interface when the form is opened, providing
a clear starting point for user input or interaction.
• Step 7: Now add the code to the Calculate and Submit button. Upon clicking the submit button, the user
should be able to add the values into the worksheet. The following VBA code seems to be part of a user
interface for calculating salaries based on certain inputs such as employee ID, name, basic pay, and
deductions.
Dim row As Long ‘in general declaration
Private Sub cmdcalculate_Click()
Dim eid As Integer, ename As String, bp As Single, da As Single, hra As Single, ts As Single, ns As Single,
ded As Single
Cells(2, 1).Value = “Employee Id”
Cells(2, 2).Value = “Employee Name”
Cells(2, 3).Value = “Basic Pay”
Cells(2, 4).Value = “DA”
Cells(2, 5).Value = “HRA”
Cells(2, 6).Value = “Deduction”
Cells(2, 7).Value = “Total Salary”
Cells(2, 8).Value = “Net Salary”
eid = txtid.Value
ename =
txtname.Text bp =
txtbp.Value
da = bp * (107 / 100)
txtda.Text = da
hra = bp * (25 / 100)
txthra.Text = hra
ded = txtded.Value
txtts.Value = bp + hra + da
txtns.Value = txtts.Value - ded
End Sub
This VBA code seems to be part of a user interface for calculating salaries based on certain inputs such as
employee ID, name, basic pay, and deductions. Let’s break down the code and explain each part:
1 Variable Declarations:
• row As Long: This declares a variable named row as a Long data type. However, this variable is not
used in the provided code snippet.
• eid As Integer, ename As String, bp As Single, da As Single, hra As Single, ts As Single, ns As
Single, ded As Single: These lines declare several variables:
• eid as an Integer to store Employee ID,
• ename as a String to store Employee Name,
• bp, da, hra, ts, ns, and ded as Single data types to store Basic Pay, Dearness Allowance, House Rent
Allowance, Total Salary, Net Salary, and Deductions respectively.
2 Command Button Click Event (cmdcalculate_Click()):
• This subroutine is executed when the user clicks the “Calculate” button.

428
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• The values from text boxes (txtid, txtname, txtbp, txtded) are assigned to respective variables (eid,
ename, bp, ded).
• Dearness Allowance (da) is calculated as 107% of the Basic Pay (bp) and stored in the da variable.
• House Rent Allowance (hra) is calculated as 25% of the Basic Pay (bp) and stored in the hra variable.
• Total Salary (ts) is calculated as the sum of Basic Pay (bp), Dearness Allowance (da), and House Rent
Allowance (hra) and displayed in the txtts textbox.
• Net Salary (ns) is calculated as the Total Salary (ts) minus Deductions (ded) and displayed in the txtns
textbox.
3 Worksheet Cell Values:
• The lines setting values in Cells(2, 1) through Cells(2, 8) are meant to label the columns in the worksheet.
These cells are likely the headers for the data being entered or calculated.
4 Displaying Calculated Values:
• The calculated values for Dearness Allowance (da) and House Rent Allowance (hra) are displayed in
text boxes txtda and txthra respectively. However, these text boxes are not shown in the provided code
snippet.
Overall, this code snippet captures the process of calculating and displaying employee salary details based on
input provided through a user interface. It seems to be designed to work with Excel VBA given the references to
cells and text boxes.
Private Sub cmdsubmit_Click()
Dim row As Long

‘Make Sheet4 active Sheet4.Activate

‘Determine emptyRow
row = WorksheetFunction.CountA(Range(“A:A”)) + 1

Cells(row, 1).Value = txtid.Value

Cells(row, 2).Value = txtname.Value
Cells(row, 3).Value = txtbp.Value
Cells(row, 4).Value = txtda.Value
Cells(row, 5).Value = txthra.Value
Cells(row, 6).Value = txtded.Value
Cells(row, 7).Value = txtts.Value
Cells(row, 8).Value = txtns.Value
End Sub
This VBA code is associated with the click event of a button named cmdsubmit. Here’s what the code does:
1 Variable Declaration:
• row As Long: Declares a variable named row as a Long data type. This variable will be used to
determine the row where the new data will be entered.
2 Activating Sheet4:
• Sheet4.Activate: This line makes sure that Sheet4 is the active sheet where the data will be entered.

429
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Determining the Next Empty Row:

• row = WorksheetFunction.CountA(Range(“A:A”)) + 1: This line calculates the next empty row in
column A of the active worksheet (Sheet4) by counting the number of non-empty cells in column A and
adding 1. It uses the CountA function of the WorksheetFunction object.
4 Assigning Values to Cells:
• The subsequent lines assign values to cells in the active worksheet (Sheet4) based on the inputs
provided in various text boxes (txtid, txtname, txtbp, txtda, txthra, txtded, txtts, txtns).
• Each value is assigned to a specific column in the determined row, allowing for the storage of employee
information and salary details.
5 Data Entry:
• The data from the text boxes (txtid, txtname, etc.) are entered into the next empty row in the specified
columns of Sheet4.
This code essentially allows users to enter employee details and their corresponding salary information into Sheet4
of the Excel workbook by clicking the “Submit” button (cmdsubmit). It automates the process of determining the
next empty row and filling in the necessary information accordingly.
• Step 8: Add a method to close the form when the user clicks the Cancel
button. Private Sub cmdcancel_Click()
Unload Me
End Sub
The above VBA code is associated with the click event of a button named cmdcancel. Here’s what the code does:
1 Unload Form:
• Unload Me: This line unloads (closes) the user form associated with the VBA code. The Me keyword
refers to the current instance of the form where the VBA code is located. Unload Me effectively closes
the form when the user clicks the “Cancel” button (cmdcancel).
• Step 9: Add a method to clear the form when the user clicks the Clear button. Private Sub cmdclear_Click()
txtid.Value = “ “
txtname.Value = “ “
txtbp.Value = “ “
txtda.Value = “ “
txthra.Value = “”
txtded.Value = “ “
txtts.Value = “ “
txtns.Value = “ “
txtid.SetFocus
End Sub
This action provides a convenient way for users to clear out all input fields and start fresh if needed. when the
user clicks the “Clear” button (cmdclear), all the text boxes’ contents are cleared, and the focus is set back to
the txtid text box, ready for new input or interaction.
• Step 10: Execute the form by clicking the “Run” button. Enter the values into the form and click the
‘Calculate’ button and the click the ‘Submit’ button. Automatically the values will flow into the worksheet as
shown in the following screenshot.

430
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Output:
1 CLICK ON CALCULATE BUTTON

2 CLICK ON SUBMIT BUTTON

Related Exercise:
1 Create a User Form – Student’s Result Sheet (Hints: Design a form with Roll No, Name, Marks of 3
subjects(each subject out of 100), calculate the total marks, percentage and grade and display the details in
the Excel sheet).Grade can be calculated based on the following conditions

431
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

If marks of any subject less than 35 then Grade = ‘F’ otherwise :

Percentage Grade

>=90 A+

>=80 and <90 A

>=70 and <80 B+

>=60 and <70 B

>=50 and <60 C+

>=40 and <50 C

>=35 and <40 D+

2 Build a form to input student grades for different assignments and exams. Include fields for Assignment Scores,
Exam Scores, and weights for each category. Calculate the overall grade based on weighted averages.
3 Create an Excel form for inventory management. Include fields for Item Name, Quantity In, Quantity Out, and
a button to calculate the current inventory level. Display the calculated inventory level for each item.

432
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 71
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 72 : Look up data by using functions

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• lookup data by using functions VLOOKUP ,HLOOKUP & INDEX formula.

Procedure
Method 1: VLOOKUP
VLOOKUP is a powerful function in Excel used to search for a value in the first column of a range (table or array)
and return a value in the same row from a column you specify.
Syntax:

• lookup_value: The value you want to search for.

• table_array: The range of cells that contains the data you want to search in. The first column of this range
should contain the lookup values.
• col_index_num: The column number in the table_array from which to return the value.
• [range_lookup] (optional): A logical value that specifies whether you want an exact match or an
approximate match. If TRUE or omitted, it will find an approximate match. If FALSE, it will find an exact
match.

TASK 1: Create a new dataset with columns ID, Product, and Price. Use the VLOOKUP function to find the
price of a product with ID 201

Products Details

ID Product Price

101 Laptop 80000

102 Smartphone 50000

103 Camera 350000

104 Smartwatch 30000

201 Headphones 2000

Now, suppose you want to look up the Price of the Product with ID 201. You can use the VLOOKUP function.
In cell D2, you can enter the formula:
=VLOOKUP(A7,A3:C7,3,FALSE)

433
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Explanation:
• lookup_value: This is the value you want to search for in the first column of the table array (in this case, cell A7).
• table_array: This is the range of cells that contains the data. It must include the column containing the
lookup value and the column containing the data you want to retrieve (in this case, cells A3:C7).
• col_index_num: This is the column number in the table_array from which the matching value should be
returned (in this case, 3, indicating the third column of the table_array).
• range_lookup: This is an optional argument that specifies whether to find an exact match or an approximate
match. If set to FALSE, it will find an exact match.
In the given example, the VLOOKUP function searches for the value in cell A7 within the range A3:C7. It then
returns the value from the third column (index 3) of the range if it finds an exact match. If no exact match is
found, it returns an error or a value specified in the function.
After entering this formula, it will return the Price of the Product with ID 201.

Related Exercises:
1 Create a new dataset with columns ID, Product, and Price, Department. Use the VLOOKUP function to find
the price of a product with ID 104.

434
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 72
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Create a dataset with columns EmployeeID, Name, Department, and Salary. Use VLOOKUP to find the salary
of an employee with a given EmployeeID.
3 Create a dynamic table that allows users to input an EmployeeID, and VLOOKUP should automatically fetch
and display the corresponding employee name, department, and salary.

Method 2: HLOOKUP
HLOOKUP is a function in Excel used to search for a value in the first row of a table (or array) and return a value
in the same column from a row you specify. Here’s how to use HLOOKUP in Excel:
Syntax:

=HLOOKUP(lookup_value, table_array, row_index_num, [range_lookup])

• lookup_value: The value you want to search for.
• table_array: The range of cells that contains the data you want to search in. The first row of this range should
contain the lookup values.
• row_index_num: The row number in the table_array from which to return the value.
• [range_lookup] (optional): A logical value that specifies whether you want an exact match or an
approximate match. If TRUE or omitted, it will find an approximate match. If FALSE, it will find an exact
match.

TASK 1: Create a dataset with columns Product, Samsung_Price, Apple_Price, and Realme_Price. Use
HLOOKUP to find the price of a specific product in row 2.

Step 1: Create the Dataset

Product Laptop Smartphone Tablet

SamSunng_Price 80000 100000 60000
Apple_price 120000 125000 80000
Realme_Price 50000 90000 60000

Step 2: Use HLOOKUP for Price Lookup

Assuming you want to find the price of the product “Smartphone,” here is the HLOOKUP formula:
=HLOOKUP(C1,A1:D4,2,FALSE)

435
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 72
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Explanation:
• C1: The value we are looking for in the first row of the table.
• A1:D4: The table array where the lookup value is located.
• 2: The row number in the table from which to retrieve the value.
• FALSE: Exact match for the lookup value.

Step 3: Result
The formula would return the price of the “Smartphone” from row 2 of the table, which is Rs.100000/-

Related Exercises:
1 Create a dataset with columns representing different cities (Chandigarh, Bhopal, Indore, Patna,
Thiruvananthapuram, Kochi, Surat, Visakhapatnam) and rows representing temperature data for each
month. Use HLOOKUP to find the temperature in Patna for the month of March.
2 Create a dataset with columns representing different months (January, February, March) and rows
representing sales data for each product. Use HLOOKUP to find the sales of a specific product in January.

Method 3: Index Formula

The INDEX function in Excel is used to return the value of a cell in a specified row and column of a given range.
It is particularly useful when you want to retrieve a specific value from a table of data.
The syntax of the INDEX function is as follows:
INDEX(array, row_num, [column_num])
• array: This is the range of cells from which you want to retrieve the value.
• row_num: This is the row number within the array from which to retrieve the value.
• column_num: (Optional) This is the column number within the array from which to retrieve the value. If omitted,
INDEX returns the entire row specified by row_num.

TASK 1: Consider the following table representing the sales data for different products

Step 1: Create Data Set

Product Details

Product January February March April

Item A 100 120 80 150
Item B 75 90 110 85
Item C 120 100 130 95
Item D 90 80 75 110

436
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 72
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 2: Use Index Formula

Using the INDEX function, find the sales value of “Item B” in February.

Result:
The result of the formula is the sales value of “Item B” in February, which is 90.

Related Exercises:
1 Create a data range in cells A1 to D10. Use the INDEX function to retrieve the value located in the 4th row
and 3rd column.
2 Create a dataset in column A, starting from A1. Create a formula using INDEX to create a dynamic range
that automatically expands as new data is added in column A.

437
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 72
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 73 : Use advanced date functions

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• use advanced date functions.

Procedure
TASK 1: Change Dates from/to Text

Using DATEVALUE Function

The DATEVALUE function in Excel converts a date represented as text into a serial number that Excel recognizes
as a date.
Syntax of DATEVALUE function:
=DATEVALUE(date_text)

Note: Dates are stored in Excel as consecutive integers, and it is only the formatting of a cell that
permits a number to be shown as a date. All dates are recorded as integers denoting the number
of days from January 1, 1900 (number 1) to December 31, 9999 (number 2958465). You can
change the serial number back to date format by pressing Ctrl+1.

TASK 2: Applying TEXT Function

The TEXT function is used to convert a numeric value, date, or time into a text string with a specified format.
Syntax of TEXT function:
=TEXT(value,format_text)

438
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

In the format text argument type your preferred formatting.

TASK 3: Fetch Dates

Using DAY Function

The DAY function extracts the day of the month from a given date and returns it as a numeric value.
Syntax of DAY function:
=DAY(date)

TASK 4: Using MONTH Function

The MONTH function extracts the month from a given date and returns it as a numeric value.
Syntax of MONTH function:
=MONTH(date)

439
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 73
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 5: Applying YEAR Funcion

The YEAR function extracts the month from a given date and returns it as a numeric value.
Syntax of YEAR function:
=YEAR(date)

TASK 6: Utilizing EOMONTH Function

The EOMONTH function finds the last day of the output month based on a specified number of months before
or after a referenced date.
Syntax of EOMONTH function:
=EOMONTH(start_date, months)

440
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 73
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 7: Applying WEEKDAY Function

The WEEKDAY function returns the day of the week for a given date and returns it as a numeric value.
Syntax of WEEKDAY function:
=WEEKDAY(date, [return_type])

TASK 8: Using WEEKNUM Function

The WEEKNUM function calculates the week number of a given date based on a specified numbering system.
Syntax of WEEKNUM function:
=WEEKNUM(date, [return_type])
The WEEKNUM function can be used in two different ways based on return type:
Way 1: Week 1 specifies the week which contains January 1st;
Way 2: Week 1 is the week that contains the first Thursday of the year.

441
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 73
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 9: Utilizing ISOWEEKNUM Function

The ISOWEEKNUM function gives the ISO week number of the year of a given date.
Syntax of ISOWEEKNUM function:
=ISOWEEKNUM(date)

442
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 73
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 10: Applying DAYS360 Function

The DAYS360 function calculates the difference between two dates using a 360-day year, assuming each month
has 30 days.
Syntax of DAYS360 function:
=DAYS360(start_date, end_date, [method])

Note: Method is an optional argument to specify the day-count method. TRUE means the function
counts European method and FALSE means the method will be the US method. The default is
FALSE.

TASK 11: Applying EDATE Function

The EDATE function adds or subtracts a specified number of months to a given date and returns the resulting
date.
Syntax of EDATE function:
=EDATE(start_date, months)

443
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 73
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 74 : Demonstrate advanced charts

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• prepare the advanced charts and graphs in excel.

Procedure
TASK 1: Prepare 3D Chart based on the following table

Step 1: First open the MS-EXCEL and then write your data there in the sheet.

Step 2: Then select all your required data. Go to the insert option, from this you can insert any type of chart and
graph according to your data.

444
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

For example here selected a 3D column chart for our dataset. Excel will automatically create the following chart
based on your data.

Step 3: Format Axis

In this step, we will format the chart axis. First, Select Axis, then Right-Click on it, and then select Format Axis.

Once we click on the Format Axis option, Excel will automatically open a Format Axis Pane.Using the format
axis pane, we can format our chart axis according to our requirements. Here, we are going to change units to
display in Major Unit with an increment of ‘50’.

445
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

We will get the following output.

Step 4: Similarly you can format the chart area by Right Clicking anywhere inside the chart area and choose
format chart area option as follows.

446
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

When selecting Format Chart Area option you will get a dialogue box as shown below.

From this dialogue box you can apply the required options in your chart.

447
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 2: Create a Combination Chart

Combination of two or more chart types in a single chart is known as a combination chart. To create a
combination chart, follow the steps
Step1: First open the MS-EXCEL and then write your data there in the sheet.

Step 2: Create a basic chart and here we are going to plot a column chart for our dataset.

Step 3: We have created a basic chart and now it’s time for complex graphs to play their role. Click either on the
orange bars or blue bars.

Note: Here, we are going to click on the blue bars which are representing the No of Employees. Go
to the design tab, click on the change chart type.

448
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 4: A dialog window appears

In that dialog window, navigate to combo from the left side of the panel and click on the employees chart type
drop down menu.

Choose the first graph under the line and press ok.

449
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Once the steps are followed, the following output appears

TASK 3: Dual-Axis Chart

The primary axis is the x-axis and the y-axis which is usually on the right side of the chart is known as the
secondary axis. Now add a secondary axis to our Excel chart to make it more understandable and look
presentable.
Step 1: Click on the chart. Go to the Design tab and click on the change chart type, a dialog window appears.

450
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Click on the change chart type. Then the following dialogue box will appear

In that dialog window, navigate to combo from the left side of the panel and click on it. You will get the following
screen

451
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

In the screen select the required chart type for No of Employees and No of Articles and check the Secondary Axis.

Finally, press ok to get the chart like this.

452
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Note: To insert the upcoming charts, follow the steps

Step 1: Open a MS Excel worksheet and click on the “Insert” button from the menu bar.
Step 2: From the Insert tab, go to the “Charts” option, there you would find different types of charts. You can
choose the desired chart from it.
Note: Choose the chart as required. For example: Radar Chart, Filled Radar
etc. Step 3: Then we need to select the data for which the graph has to be
plotted Eg 1: Spider/Radar Chart
Displays multivariate data on a circular grid, with each axis representing a different variable. Spider charts are
useful for comparing the performance of multiple entities across different metrics.
These charts represent the values relative to a centre point. Radar with Markers charts represents the markers
for the individual points and Radar charts are represented without the markers for the individual points. The
user uses the Radar and Radar with Marker charts when the categories are not directly comparable.

453
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Eg 2: Filled Radar
In filled radar charts, the data series is filled with a colour. This chart represents the values relative to a centre
point.

Related Exercise
Here’s a simple table of a sales data containing ProductCode, product Name, QuantitySold and Rate:

Product Code Product Name Quantity Sold Rate

ABC123 Widget A 100 500
XYZ456 Widget B 75 400
DEF789 Widget C 150 250
GHI012 Widget D 200 800
AHF213 Widget E 560 300
RFE033 Widget F 70 350
GF456 Widget G 220 340
Using the above sales data table containing Product codes, Product names, Quantities sold and Rate, create
an advanced chart in Excel that visually compares the sales performance of the top 5 best-selling products.
Ensure that the chart includes labels, appropriate formatting, and any necessary visual enhancements to
effectively communicate the sales insights.

454
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 74
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 75 : Demonstrate pivot tables

Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• make pivot tables for summarizing and analyzing data sheets.

Procedure
Demonstrate PivotTables
A PivotTable in Microsoft Excel is a powerful tool used for summarizing, analyzing, exploring, and presenting
large amounts of data from various sources. It allows users to rearrange and summarize selected columns and
rows of data into a more useful format without altering the original data set. Here’s a step-by-step guide on how
to create a PivotTable in Excel:
1 Prepare your data: Ensure that your data is organized in rows and columns with a clear header row. There
should be no blank rows or columns within the data set. Each column should have a header that describes
the data it contains.
2 Select your data: Click anywhere within the range of data you want to analyze.
3 Insert a PivotTable:
• Go to the “Insert” tab on the Excel ribbon.
• Click on the “PivotTable” button. This will open the “Create PivotTable” dialog box.
4 Choose your data range:
• In the “Create PivotTable” dialog box, Excel will automatically detect the range of your data. Ensure that
this range is correct.
• You can also manually specify the data range if Excel doesn’t detect it automatically.
5 Choose where to place your PivotTable:
• Decide whether you want the PivotTable to be placed in a new worksheet or an existing worksheet.
• Select the location where you want your PivotTable to be placed and click “OK”.
6 Design your PivotTable:
• Once the PivotTable is inserted, you’ll see the PivotTable Field List pane on the right.
• Drag and drop the fields from your data into the “Rows”, “Columns”, “Values”, or “Filters” area, depending
on how you want to summarize and analyze your data.
• You can also apply functions (e.g., sum, count, average) to the values in the PivotTable by clicking on the
drop-down arrow next to the field in the “Values” area and selecting “Value Field Settings”.
7 Customize your PivotTable:
• You can further customize your PivotTable by formatting the cells, changing the layout, applying filters,
sorting data, and more.
• Experiment with different arrangements and configurations to see what best suits your analysis needs.
8 Refresh your PivotTable (if needed):
• If your source data changes, you can refresh your PivotTable to reflect those changes. Right-click anywhere
in the PivotTable and select “Refresh”.
9 Save your workbook:
• Once you’re done creating and customizing your PivotTable, make sure to save your Excel workbook to
preserve your work.
By following these steps, you can create and customize PivotTables in Excel to analyze your data more effectively.

455
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 1: Let’s say we wanted to answer the question: What is the amount sold by each salesperson? for
the sales data in the example below. Answering this question could be time consuming and difficult-
each salesperson appears on multiple rows, and we would need to total all of their different orders
individually. We could use the Subtotal command to help find the total for each salesperson, but we
would still have a lot of data to work with.

Fortunately, a PivotTable can instantly calculate and summarize the data in a way that’s both easy to read
and manipulate. When we’re done, the PivotTable will look something like this:
Once you’ve created a PivotTable, you can use it to answer different questions by rearranging-or pivoting-the
data. For example, if we wanted to answer the question: What is the total amount sold in each month? we
could modify our PivotTable to look like this:
To create a PivotTable:
1 Select the table or cells (including column headers) containing the data you want to use.

2 From the Insert tab, click the PivotTable command.

456
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 The Create PivotTable dialog box will appear. Choose your settings, then click OK. In our example, we’ll use
Table1 as our source data and place the PivotTable on a new worksheet.

457
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 A blank PivotTable and Field List will appear on a new worksheet.

5 Once you create a PivotTable, you’ll need to decide which fields to add. Each field is simply a column
header from the source data. In the PivotTable Field List, check the box for each field you want to add. In
our example, we want to know the total amount sold by each salesperson, so we’ll check the Salesperson
and Order Amount fields.

6 The selected fields will be added to one of the four areas below the Field List. In our example, the
Salesperson field has been added to the Rows area, while the Order Amount has been added to the
Values area. Alternatively, you can click, hold, and drag a field to the desired area.

458
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

7 The PivotTable will calculate and summarize the selected fields. In our example, the PivotTable shows the
amount sold by each salesperson.

Just like with normal spreadsheet data, you can sort the data in a PivotTable using the Sort & Filter command
in the Home tab. You can also apply any type of number formatting you want. For example, you may want to
change the Number Format to Currency. However, be aware that some types of formatting may disappear
when you modify the PivotTable.

459
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

If you change any of the data in your source worksheet, the PivotTable will not update automatically. To
manually update it, select the PivotTable and then go to Analyze > Refresh.
Pivoting data
One of the best things about PivotTables is that they can quickly pivot—or reorganize—data, allowing you to
look at your worksheet data in different ways. Pivoting data can help you answer different questions and even
experiment with the data to discover new trends and patterns.
In our example, we used the PivotTable to answer the question: What is the total amount sold by each
salesperson? But now we’d like to answer a new question: What is the total amount sold in each month? We
can do this by simply changing the field in the Rows area.
To change the row:
1 Click, hold, and drag any existing fields out of the Rows area. The field will disappear.

460
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Drag a new field from the Field List into the Rows area. In our example, we’ll use the Month field.

3 The PivotTable will adjust-or pivot-to show the new data. In our example, it now shows the total order
amount for each month.

To add columns:
So far, our PivotTable has only shown one column of data at a time. In order to show multiple columns, you’ll need
to add a field to the Columns area.
1 Drag a field from the Field List into the Columns area. In our example, we’ll use the Region field.

461
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 The PivotTable will include multiple columns. In our example, there is now a column for each region.

Filters
Sometimes you may want focus on just a certain section of your data. Filters can be used to narrow down the data
in your PivotTable, allowing you to view only the information you need.
To add a filter:
In our example, we’ll filter out certain salespeople to determine how they affect the total sales.
1 Drag a field from the Field List to the Filters area. In this example, we’ll use the Salesperson field.

462
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 The filter will appear above the PivotTable. Click the drop-down arrow, then check the box next to Select
Multiple Items.

3 Uncheck the box for any items you don’t want to include in the PivotTable. In our example, we’ll uncheck the
boxes for a few different salespeople, then click OK.

4 The PivotTable will adjust to reflect the changes.

463
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Slicers
Slicers make filtering data in PivotTables even easier. Slicers are basically just filters, but they’re easier and faster
to use, allowing you to instantly pivot your data. If you frequently filter your PivotTables, you may want to
consider using slicers instead of filters.
To add a slicer:
1 Select any cell in the PivotTable.
2 From the Analyze tab, click the Insert Slicer command.

464
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 A dialog box will appear. Select the desired field. In our example, we’ll select Salesperson, then click OK.

4 The slicer will appear next to the PivotTable. Each selected item will be highlighted in blue. In the example
below, the slicer contains a list of all salespeople, and six of them are currently selected.

5 Just like filters, only selected items are used in the PivotTable. When you select or deselect items, the
PivotTable will instantly reflect the changes. Try selecting different items to see how they affect the
PivotTable. Press and hold the Ctrl key on your keyboard to select multiple items from a slicer.

465
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

You can also click the Filter icon in the top-right corner to select all items from the slicer at once.

TASK 2: Create Pivot Chart from above table

1 Select any cell in your PivotTable.

466
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 From the Insert tab, click the PivotChart command.

3 The Insert Chart dialog box will appear. Select the desired chart type and layout, then click OK.

4 The PivotChart will appear.

Try using slicers or filters to change the data that is displayed. The PivotChart will automatically adjust to show
the new data.

467
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 3: By using the following product details data

a Create a Pivot Table to display the Order ID and Sum of Total Cost
b Create a Pivot Chart based on that Pivot Table
To create a PivotTable:
1 Select the table or cells (including column headers) containing the data you want to use.

468
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 From the Insert tab, click the PivotTable command.

3 The Create PivotTable dialog box will appear. Choose your settings, then click OK. In our example, we’ll use
Table1 as our source data and place the PivotTable on a new worksheet.

4 The selected fields will be added to one of the four areas below the Field List. In our example, the Order ID
field has been added to the Rows area, while the Total Cost has been added to the Values area.
Alternatively, you can click, hold, and drag a field to the desired area.

469
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

5 The PivotTable will calculate and summarize the selected fields.

6 From the Insert tab, click the PivotChart command.

470
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

7 The Insert Chart dialog box will appear. Select the desired chart type and layout, then click OK.

471
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

8 The PivotChart will appear.

Related Exercise.
1 “By using the provided employee data, create a pivot table to analyze the total salary expenditure by
department. Additionally, identify the department with the highest total salary expenditure and the average
salary within that department.”

S.No. EmployeeName Designation Department Salary

1 John Manager Sales 50000
2 Alice Assistant Manager Marketing 40000
3 Bob Sales Executive Sales 36000
4 Emma Marketing Analyst Marketing 32000
5 David Sales Associate Sales 28000
6 Sarah HR Assistant HR 25000
7 Michael Finance Manager Finance 60000

Customize your pivot table further by applying filters, formatting, and rearranging fields as needed. Also prepare
the Pivot Chart.
2 “By using the following product sales data, analyze the total sales revenue generated by each product.
Additionally, visualize this data by creating both a pivot table and a pivot chart. Identify the product with the
highest total sales revenue and its corresponding sales quantity.

Product Code Product Name Sales Quantity Unit Price Total Price
001 Widget A 100 $10 $1000
002 Widget B 150 $8 $1200
003 Widget C 200 $15 $3000
004 Widget D 75 $20 $1500
005 Widget E 120 $12 $1440
006 Widget F 90 $18 $1620

472
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 75
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 76 : Demonstrate a power query, power query

function. Invoking the power query
function and combining
queries. Organize the workbook
queries
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• install power query
• demonstrate a power query, power query function
• invoking the power query function and combining queries.

Procedure
How to Install Power Query
Excel 2016
Power Query is included with Excel 2016 (Office 365). It has been renamed and is now on the Data tab of the
Ribbon in the Get & Transform section.

This means there is nothing to install. If you are using Excel 2016, go to the Data tab on the ribbon and press the
New Query button to create a query and open the Power Query editor.
Power Query is available with all levels of Office 365 subscriptions.
Excel 2010 & 2013
For Excel 2010 and 2013 you will need to download the Power Query add-in and install it.
The installation steps are about the same in Excel 2010 and 2013.
1 Close (exit) Excel completely.
2 Click the following link to go to the download page.
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=39379
3 Click the Download button.

473
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Click the checkbox for the bit version you are using. Most likely you will be using 32-bit.

5 Click Next
6 The add-in installation file will download. Click the file to run the installation.

474
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

7 The Setup Wizard window will open. Follow the steps to install Power Query.

8 Once the installation is complete, open Excel. You should now see the Power Query tab in the Ribbon.

475
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

My Power Query Tab Disappeared

If your Power Query tab ever goes missing, you can usually re-enable the add-in by going to the COM Add-ins
menu.
There are a few ways to get to the COM Add-ins menu.
1 File menu.
2 Click Options on left side menu.
3 Click Add-ins on left side menu.
4 Select COM Add-ins from the Manage drop-down.
5 Click the Go… button.

6 That will open the COM Add-ins Window. If the Power Query check box is not selected, just select it to reload
the add-in.

476
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 1: Create a simple Power Query program using a sample Excel file

1 Load Data:
• Open Excel and create a new workbook.
• Enter some sample data into a worksheet.

• Go to the “Data” tab and click “Get Data” > “From Table/Range.”/ Go to the “Power Query” tab and click
“From Table/Range.”

477
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Power Query Editor:

• The Power Query Editor will open, displaying a preview of your data.
• You can see the “SL NO”,” “NAME,” “Salary,” and “NO OF YEAR”columns.

478
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 Transform Data:
• Let’s add a new column that calculates a bonus based on the Principal Amount. Click on “Add Column” >
“Custom Column.”

• Name the new column: “Interest”

• Enter the formula: = [Principal Amount] * [No of Years] *0.12 (Assuming a 12% Interest)

479
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Click “OK” to create the new column.

4 Load Transformed Data:

• Once you’re satisfied with the transformations, click “Close & Apply” to load the data back into Excel.

480
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• The transformed data will appear in your existing workbook.

TASK 2: Create a simple Power Query program using a sample Excel file

Step 1: Load Data

1 Open Excel and create a new worksheet.
2 Enter some sample data in a table. For example:

481
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Select the data and Go to the “Data” tab and click “Get Data” > “From Table/Range.”/ Go to the “Power
Query” tab and click “From Table/Range.

• Then Power Query Editor will open. Here, you can see a preview of your data.

482
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Then Click “Advanced Editor” to open the script editor.

• Then Click “Advanced Editor” to open the script editor.

483
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Write the code

484
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

// Add a new column “Sum” by adding the values from the referenced cells
CombinedQuery = Table.AddColumn(Source, “Sum”, each [Principal Amount] + [Interest])
• Excel.CurrentWorkbook(): Function that references the entire current workbook.
• {[Name=”Table13_2”]}: Accesses a specific table in the workbook named “Table13_2.”
• [Content]: Retrieves the content of the “Table13_2” table.
Add a New Column “Sum”
// Add a new column “Sum” by adding the values from the referenced cells
CombinedQuery = Table.AddColumn(Source, “Sum”, each [Principal Amount] + [Interest])
• Table.AddColumn(Source, “Sum”, each [Principal Amount] + [Interest]): Adds a new column named
“Sum” to the Source table.
• each [Principal Amount] + [Interest]: Defines the operation to be performed in each row of the new “Sum”
column. It adds the values from the “Principal Amount” and “Interest” columns.

• Click “Close & Apply” to apply the changes and load the data into your Excel workbook or Power BI report.

485
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

This code assumes that you have a table named “Table13_2” in your workbook with columns named “Principal
Amount” and “Interest.” The result is a new table (CombinedQuery) that includes the original columns from
“Table13_2” and an additional column named “Sum” containing the sum of the “Principal Amount” and “Interest”
values for each row.

TASK 3 :
Create a table named “OrderDetails” containing columns for “Product”, “Quantity”, and “UnitPrice”. Apply a 10%
discount to the “UnitPrice” for orders where the quantity purchased is greater than or equal to 10.
Order Details

Product Quantity Unit Price

Product A 8 20.00

Product B 15 30.00

Product C 5 10.00

Product D 12 25.00

Product E 20 15.00

Product F 9 18.00

Product G 7 22.00

Product H 14 28.00

Product I 6 12.00

Product J 11 35.00

486
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

1 Load Data:
• Open Excel and create a new workbook.
• Enter some sample data into a worksheet.

• Go to the “Data” tab and click “Get Data” > “From Table/Range.”/ Go to the “Power Query” tab and click
“From Table/Range.”

487
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

2 Power Query Editor:

• The Power Query Editor will open, displaying a preview of your data.
• You can see the “Product”, “Quantity,” and “Unit Price” columns.

3 Transform Data:
• Let’s add a new column that calculates a DiscountedPrice based on the Quantity. Click on “Add Column” >
“Custom Column.”

488
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Name the new column: “DiscountedPrice”

• Enter the formula: = if [Quantity] >= 10 then [UnitPrice] * 0.1 else 0

• Click “OK” to create the new column.

489
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Let’s add a new column that calculates Net Price based on the Quantity, Unit Price and Discounted Price.
Click on “Add Column” > “Custom Column.”

• Click “OK” again to create the new column.

490
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

4 Load Transformed Data:

• Once you’re satisfied with the transformations, click “Close & Apply” to load the data back into Excel.

• The transformed data will appear in your existing workbook.

491
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASK 4:

As an HR analyst at a company managing employee information, you have been provided with two tables in your
Excel workbook: “EmployeeData” and “DepartmentData”. The “EmployeeData” table contains details of
employees, including their ID, name, and department ID, while the “DepartmentData” table includes information
about departments, including their ID and name.
Your task is to perform the following operations:
1 Merge the “EmployeeData” and “DepartmentData” tables based on the department ID to create a
consolidated dataset.
2 Add a new column in the consolidated dataset containing the name of the department for each employee.
3 Organize the workbook queries to ensure efficient management.
Employee Data Table:

Employee ID Name Department ID

001 John Smith 101
002 Emily Brown 102
003 David Lee 101

Department Data Table:

Department ID Department Name

101 HR
102 Finance
103 Marketing

Step 1: Merge Tables

1 Open Microsoft Excel and navigate to the “Data” tab.
2 Click on “Get Data” > “From File” > “From Workbook” to import both “EmployeeData” and “DepartmentData” tables.

492
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

493
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

3 In the “Navigator” window, select both tables and click “Load” to load them into the Power Query Editor.

4 In the Power Query Editor, select the “EmployeeData” table.

5 Click on the “Merge Queries” dropdown menu and select “Merge Queries as New”.

494
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

6 Choose “DepartmentData” from the dropdown list and select “Department ID” as the matching column.
7 Select an appropriate join type, such as “Inner Join”, and click “OK”.

495
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

496
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

8 The tables are merged based on the department ID

Related Exercises:
1 Create “Employee Data” table containing information about employees, including their EmployeeID, Name,
Department, and Salary. Your task is to perform advanced filtering and parameterization to analyze
employee bonuses based on salary levels.
Employee Data:

EmployeeID Name Department Salary

101 John Smith IT 60000
102 Jane Doe HR 75000
103 Bob Johnson Sales 80000
104 Alice Brown IT 70000
105 Mark White Sales 90000

TASKS :

1 Load the “Employee Data” into Power Query.

2 Create a parameter named “MinSalary” that represents the minimum salary for filtering.
3 Use the “MinSalary” parameter to dynamically filter the “Employee Data” table, keeping only the rows where
the salary is greater than or equal to the parameter value.
4 Add a custom column named “Bonus” based on the following conditions:
• If the salary is above 65000, assign a bonus of 5%.
• If the salary is between 60000 and 65000, assign a bonus of 3%.
• Otherwise, assign a bonus of 1%.
5 Load the final table into the Excel workbook.
Create “Sales Data” table with sample data, along with a Python script that performs combining and
aggregating operations to analyze the total revenue for each product.
Sales Data Table:

OrderID CustomerID ProductID Quantity Revenue

1 101 201 2 100
2 102 202 1 50
3 103 201 3 150
4 104 203 2 120
5 105 202 1 50

497
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

TASKS :
1 Load the “Sales Data” into Power Query.
2 Combine this table with a reference table containing information about each product, such as the
“ProductID” and “ProductCategory.” Assume this reference table is named “ProductInfo.”
3 Aggregate the combined data to calculate the total revenue for each product category.
4 Create a new column in the final table named “AverageRevenuePerUnit” that calculates the average revenue
per unit sold for each product category.
You have a “Monthly Sales” table containing information about sales data over several months. Your task is to
perform time series analysis to understand the trends in monthly sales.

Date Sales Amount

2022-01-01 10000
2022-02-01 12000
2022-03-01 15000

TASKS :
1 Load the “Monthly Sales” into Power Query.
2 Create a new column named “Month” that extracts the month and year from the “Date” column.
3 Calculate the month-to-month percentage change in sales and add it as a new column.
4 Identify any months with significant increases or decreases in sales.

498
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 76
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

EXERCISE 77 : Demonstrate Power BI for simple data

visualizations
Objectives
At the end of this exercise you shall be able to
• demonstrate power BI for simple data visualizations.

Procedure
Power BI is a powerful business analytics tool developed by Microsoft. It allows users to visualize and analyze
data from various sources in interactive reports and dashboards.
Download and Install Power BI Desktop
Here are some requirements of the system to download the Power BI Desktop:
• Window 7, window 8, window 8.1, window 10, and windows server 2008 R2, windows server 2012, windows
server 2012 R2.
• It requires internet explorer 9 or higher.
• Power BI Desktop is available for both 32 bit and 64-bit platforms.
• Let’s see the downloading process of the Power BI Desktop step by step:
Step 1: Click on the below link to directly download Power BI Desktop. https://powerbi.microsoft.com/en-us/
desktop/
Step 2: Then click on the Download Free button.

Step 3: Now, you will redirect to a Microsoft Store and then select the Get button.

499
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 4: Click on the Install button.

you can see the progress status of the Power BI Desktop on the screen.

Step 5: You can see “welcome to Power BI Desktop” screen and then register yourself on the desktop.

500
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 6: When you run the Power BI desktop, it displayed the home page or welcome screen.

Power BI Dashboard
Power BI dashboard is a single page, also called a canvas that uses visualization to tell the story. It is limited to
one page; therefore, a well-designed dashboard contains only the most essential elements of that story.
The visualizations visible on the dashboard are known as tiles. These tiles are pinned to the dashboard from
reports. The visualizations on a dashboard come from reports, and each report is based on one data set.
A dashboard can combine on-premises and cloud-born data. And they are providing a consolidated view
regardless of where the data lies.

501
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Creating Dashboard in Power BI

We need to import one sample datasets of the Power BI and use it to create a new dashboard.
For example, suppose a sample such as Procurement Analysis. This sample is an excel workbook with two
PowerView sheets.
When Power BI imports the workbook, it adds a dataset and a report to the workspace. Let’s see step by step.
Step 1: Open the Power BI Desktop and click on the File pane.
Step 2: Go to the Import option.
Step 3: And select the Excel dataset file to import the file.

Step 4: Select the procurement analysis sample file. Eg: You can select the sample data set from the link https://
www.kaggle.com/datasets

502
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 5: And click on the Open button.

Step 6: For the exercise, select the Start button.

It starts import excel workbook and creating report view worksheets shown in the below screenshot.

503
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Step 7: When the completed message appears, then select the Close button to dismiss it.

In the below screenshot, you can see the discount analysis of the imported dataset in the form of tiles.

504
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77
 COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

Power BI Reports
A Power BI report is a multi-perspective view into the dataset, with visualizations which represent different
findings and insights from that dataset.
A report can have a single visualization or multiple visualizations. The visualizations in a report represent
something like a dashboard does but serve a different purpose.
These visualizations are not static. These are highly interactive & highly customizable visualizations which
update, as the underlying data changes. You can add and remove the data, change visualization types, and
apply filters in your model to discover insights.

Related Exercises:
Simple Data Visualizations in Power BI
Scenario:
You have been provided with a dataset containing information about monthly sales for a retail business. The
dataset includes columns such as Date, Product Category, Sales Amount, and Region.
TASKS:
1 Import Data:
• Load the provided dataset into Power BI.
2 Data Cleaning and Transformation:
• Perform any necessary data cleaning and transformation steps to ensure the data is suitable for analysis.
3 Create Visualizations:
• Design the following visualizations:
• Line Chart: Display the trend of total sales over different months.

505
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77
COMPUTER SOFTWARE APPLICATION - CITS

• Bar Chart: Compare sales amounts for different product categories.

• Map: Show the geographical distribution of sales using the Region information.
4 Implement Slicers:
• Add slicers to enable dynamic filtering. For example, create a slicer for the date range to view sales for a
specific period.
5 Calculate Key Metrics:
• Create new calculated columns or measures to calculate important metrics, such as monthly growth rate
or total sales.
6 Dashboard Creation:
• Assemble the visualizations on a Power BI dashboard for a comprehensive overview.
7 Interactive Elements:
• Implement interactive elements such as tooltips, drill-throughs, or bookmarks to enhance user experience.
Dataset Example:

Date Product Category Sales Amount Region

2022-01-01 Electronics 10000 North
2022-02-01 Clothing 12000 South
2022-03-01 Home Goods 15000 East

506
CITS : IT & ITES - Computer Software Application - Exercise 77